2009 Chrysler 300c 68

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the features and equipment that are either standard or op-
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefor. tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL description of features and equipment that are no longer
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
accidents. disregard any features and equipment described in this
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood manual that are not on this vehicle.
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-
WARNING!
ously manufactured.
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2008 Chrysler LLC
SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 3
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 8
9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 10
INTRODUCTION 1
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number .............. 6
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis- Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint contains the information you desire.
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
The detailed Index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
and various customer-oriented documents. You are
urged to read these publications carefully. Following the Consult the following table for a description of the
instructions and recommendations in this manual will symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. this Owner’s Manual:
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained
technicians and genuine Mopar威 parts, and is interested
in your satisfaction.
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information VIN Location
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN.
vehicle registration, and the title.
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
1
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm System — If Equipped . . 18
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ FOB With Integrated Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 ▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 ▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 䡵 Illuminated Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
䡵 Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . 15 䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 ▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 ▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 ▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

▫ Programming Additional RKE Transmitters . . . 25 ▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
▫ RKE Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . 25 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 䡵 Trunk Lock And Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 27 䡵 Trunk Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 ▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . 50
▫ Passive Entry System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 33 ▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
▫ To Place An RKE Transmitter In The Vehicle ▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System
For Safekeeping – Vehicles Equipped With (BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Keyless Go Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
▫ Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped . . . . 52
▫ Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 53 ▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 ▫ Lock Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
▫ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental ▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 2
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 54
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 78
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Fob with Integrated Key and a Wireless
Ignition Node (WIN) with integral ignition switch. You
can insert the double-sided integrated key into the igni-
tion switch with either side up.
Keyless Go Feature
This vehicle may be equipped with the Keyless Go feature,
for more information, refer to “Keyless Go — If Equipped”
under “Starting Procedure” in Section 5 of this manual.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with 1 — LOCK
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent posi- 2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON
tions are LOCK, ACC, and ON. The START position is a 4 — START
spring-loaded momentary contact position. When re-
leased from the START position, the switch automatically
returns to the ON position.
Fob with Integrated Key

The Fob with Integrated Key (FOBIK) operates the igni-
tion switch. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and a valet key, which stores in the rear 2
of the Fob.
The valet key allows for entry into the vehicle should the
battery in the vehicle or the Fob go dead. The valet key is
also for locking the glove box. You can keep the valet key
with you when valet parking.
To remove the valet key from the Fob, slide the mechani-
cal latch at the top of the Fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out of the Fob with your other Valet Key Removal
hand. NOTE: You can insert the double-sided valet key into
the lock cylinders with either side up.
Ignition Key Removal Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information

Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the key to the LOCK Center (EVIC) –If Equipped” in Section 4.
position and then remove the key.
WARNING!
NOTE:
• For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
Information Center (EVIC), the power window unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
power outlets will remain active for 10 minutes after ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the
the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. ignition. A child could operate power windows,
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. other controls, or move the vehicle.
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), CAUTION!
and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 min-
utes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
position. Opening either front door will cancel this remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors
feature. The time for this feature is programmable. when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Refer to “Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit,”
under “Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Key-In-Ignition Reminder the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
If you open the driver’s door and the key is in the seconds if an invalid RKE transmitter is used to start the
ignition, a chime will sound to remind you to remove the engine.
key.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON position, the
2
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
position. indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
SENTRY KEY姞 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM it indicates that someone used an invalid RKE transmitter
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system prevents unautho- to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in
rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The the engine being shut off after two seconds.
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
or unlocked. vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec-
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
The system uses the factory-mated Remote Keyless Entry Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
(RKE) transmitter with integrated key and Wireless Igni- possible.
tion Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle opera-
tion. Therefore, only RKE transmitters that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
NOTE: the vehicle. Once an RKE transmitter is programmed to a

• The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compatible vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
with aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these
systems may result in vehicle starting problems and CAUTION!
loss of security protection.
Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all
• Exxon/Mobil Speedpass™, additional RKE transmit- doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
ters, or any other transponder-equipped components
on the same key chain will not cause a fault unless the At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
additional part is physically held against the RKE with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
transmitter being used to start the vehicle. Cell Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
phones, pagers, or other Radio Frequency (RF) elec- required for authorized dealer replacement of RKE trans-
tronics will not cause interference with this system. mitters. Duplication of RKE transmitters may be per-
formed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer
All of the RKE transmitters provided with your new
Key Programming procedure. This procedure consists of
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
programming a blank RKE transmitter to the vehicle
Replacement Keys electronics. A blank RKE transmitter is one that has never
been programmed.
NOTE: Only RKE transmitters that are programmed to
the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer 3. Insert a blank integrated key into the ignition switch
system serviced, bring all vehicle RKE transmitters with and turn the ignition switch to the ON position within
you to an authorized dealer. 60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound
Customer Key Programming
and the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing, turn on 2
again for three seconds, and then turn off.
If you have two valid RKE transmitters with integrated
keys, you can program new RKE transmitters to the The new integrated key is programmed. The Remote
system by performing the following procedure: Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be pro-
grammed during this procedure.
1. Insert the first valid integrated key into the ignition
switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position for Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
at least three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. do not have a programmed RKE transmitter with inte-
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and grated key, contact your authorized dealer for details.
remove the first key.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
2. Insert the second valid integrated key and turn the dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys-
ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds. tem’s memory. This will prevent the lost key from
After 10 seconds, a chime will sound and the Vehicle starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be
Security Light will begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an
to the LOCK position and remove the second key. authorized dealer at the time of service to be
reprogrammed.
General Information Rearming of the System

The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15 If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is disarm it, the system will turn the horn off after three
subject to the following conditions: minutes, turn all of the visual signals off after 15 minutes,
and then the system will rearm itself.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
To Arm the System
• This device must accept any interference that may be
Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press
received, including interference that may cause undes-
a power door LOCK switch while the driver or passenger
ired operation.
door is open or press the LOCK button on the Remote
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. After the last door is
EQUIPPED closed, or if all doors are closed, the system will arm itself
The Vehicle Security Alarm system monitors the vehicle in about 16 seconds. During that time, the Vehicle Secu-
doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for rity Light will flash. If it does not illuminate, the system
unauthorized operation. If something triggers the alarm, is not arming. In addition, if you open a door during the
the system will prevent the vehicle from starting and arming period, the system will cancel the arming process.
provide the following audible and visible signals: the If you wish to rearm the system after closing the door,
horn will pulse; the headlights will flash; the park lights you must repeat one of the previously-described arming
will flash; and the Vehicle Security Light in the instru- sequences.
ment cluster will flash.
To Disarm the System system will arm regardless of whether you are in the
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch and door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
turn the key to the ON position. system. 2
NOTE: If the alarm system is armed and the battery becomes
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on disconnected the system will remain armed when the
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the system. battery is reconnected. The exterior lights will flash, the
horn will sound, and the ignition will not start the
• The system remains armed during trunk entry. Press-
vehicle. If this occurs, disarm the system.
ing the TRUNK button will not disarm the system. If
someone enters the vehicle through the trunk, and Tamper Alert
opens any door, the alarm will sound. If something has triggered the system in your absence,
the horn will sound three times when you disarm the
• When the system is armed, the interior power door
system. Check the vehicle for tampering.
lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm system is designed to protect
your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where
the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the
previously-described arming sequences has occurred, the
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)

The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from dis-
door. tances up to about 35 ft (11 m) using a handheld radio
RKE transmitter with integrated key. The RKE transmit-
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
ter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Outside Mirrors
system.
with Turn Signal and Approach Lighting – If Equipped”
under “Mirrors” in Section 3. NOTE: Inserting the RKE transmitter with integrated
key into the ignition switch disables all buttons on that
The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they
RKE transmitter; however, the buttons on the remaining
will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is
RKE transmitters will continue to work. Driving at
turned ON from the LOCK position.
speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables all RKE
NOTE: None of the courtesy lights will operate if the transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme
downward position), unless the overhead map/reading
lights are turned on manually.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st

Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the 2
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Remote Key
Unlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) –If Equipped” in Section 4.
RKE Transmitter with Integrated Key • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
To Unlock the Doors following procedure:
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice
RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but no longer
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal
than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
button while still holding the LOCK button.
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
2. Release both buttons at the same time. • For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Flash
Lights with Remote Key Lock,” under ⬙Personal Set-
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
tings (Customer-Programmable Features)” under
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) – If
with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the
Equipped” in Section 4.
key removed.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
following procedure:
its previous setting.
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but no longer
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button
security alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
while still holding the UNLOCK button.
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
UNLOCK button to deactivate the security alarm. 2. Release both buttons at the same time.
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock 3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit- with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change key removed.
the current setting, proceed as follows:
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to To Lock the Doors
its previous setting. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the security
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal. 2
alarm. Opening a door with the security alarm activated Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
to deactivate the security alarm. are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
proceed as follows:
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. • For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Sound
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles Horn with Remote Key Lock,” under “Personal Set-
equipped with the EVIC. Refer to “Turn Headlights On tings (Customer-Programmable Features)” under
with Remote Key Unlock,” under “Personal Settings “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) – If
(Customer-Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Equipped” in Section 4.
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) – If Equipped” in
Section 4.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the alarm. Opening a door with the security alarm activated
following procedure: will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the security alarm.
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans-
mitter for at least four seconds, but no longer than To Unlatch the Trunk
10 seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
holding the LOCK button. times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
2. Release both buttons at the same time. Using the Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key re-
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
moved.
on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the security (24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE: RKE Transmitter Battery Service

• The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
switch to the ACC or ON position while the Panic battery.
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
NOTE:
2
horn will remain on.
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
housing or the printed circuit board.
by the system.
Programming Additional RKE Transmitters
Refer to Sentry Key威 “Customer Key Programming.”
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
1. Battery access is through a door located on the rear of 2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the
the fob. Insert a small, flat blade screwdriver into the slot new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
and gently pry open the access door. battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. Reposition the access door panel over the battery
opening and snap into place.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
Battery Replacement operation.
1— Battery Access Door
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal How to Use Remote Start
distance, check for these two conditions: All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
life of the battery is a minimum of three years. • Shift lever in PARK
2
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station • Doors closed
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
• Hood closed
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED • Trunk closed
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
mitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the • Hazard switch off
vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a • Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
targeted range of 328 ft (100 m).
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-
matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start. • Battery at an acceptable charge level, and
• RKE PANIC button not pressed.
To Enter Remote Start Mode To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the
Press and release the REMOTE START button Vehicle
on the RKE transmitter twice, within five sec- Allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
onds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle
will honk twice (if programmed). Then, the
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
NOTE: equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch
Remote Start mode. to the ON position.
• For security, power window and power sunroof op- NOTE:
eration (if so equipped) are disabled when the vehicle • The ignition switch must be in the ON position in
is in the Remote Start mode. order to drive the vehicle.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two • For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, Information Center (EVIC), the message “Insert Key/
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position Turn To Run” will flash in the EVIC until you insert
before you can repeat the start sequence for a third the key. Once inserted, the message “Turn To Run”
cycle. will flash in the EVIC until you turn the key to run.
To Turn Off the Engine While in Remote Start

Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time.
NOTE: To avoid inadvertent shut downs, the system
2
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock plunger on each
door trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the Door Lock Plunger
door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward. If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Unsuper-
vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries and death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in Power Door Lock Switch
the ignition. A child could operate power win- If you press the power door lock switch while the key is
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle. in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
locks will not operate. This prevents you from acciden-
Power Door Locks tally locking the key in the vehicle. Removing the key or
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
is open, the key is in the ignition, and the ignition is in the Automatic Door Locks Programming
LOCK or ACC position, a chime will sound as a reminder The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or
to remove the key. disabled as follows:
Automatic Door Locks • For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
2
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Lock Doors Au-
door locks if all of the following conditions are met: tomatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)” under “Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” under
1. The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled.
2. The transmission is in gear. Equipped” in Section 4.
3. All doors are closed. • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
4. The throttle is pressed.
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h), and
switch.
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK
transmitter.
position.
3. Depress the power door LOCK switch to lock the 3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
doors.
4. The driver door is opened.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
5. The doors were not previously unlocked, and
programming.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
its previous setting. Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
NOTE: Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor-
enabled or disabled as follows:
dance with local laws.
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Unlock
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit
Doors Automatically on Exit” under “Personal Set-
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
tings (Customer-Programmable Features)” under
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en- Equipped” in Section 4.
abled.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the Passive Entry System — If Equipped
following procedure: The Passive Entry system allows you to unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) without using the Remote Keyless Entry
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
(RKE) transmitter unlock button, or the unlock button 2
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and located on the vehicle’s interior door panel. To use this
then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK feature you must have a valid RKE transmitter within 3 ft
position. (1.5 m) of the door handle you desire to use.
3. Depress the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock To Unlock the Vehicle’s Doors
the doors. To unlock the vehicle’s door(s), grasp the door handle
and the door(s) will unlock.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming. NOTE:
• If the vehicle has not been used for 72 hours or it has
been raining for 24 hours, you may have to pull a door
handle to reactivate this feature.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
• If the vehicle’s door locks are programmed to “Unlock
in accordance with local laws.
Driver’s Door 1st Press”, only the driver’s door will
unlock when the driver’s door handle is grasped. If the
vehicle’s door locks are programmed to “Unlock All
Doors 1st Press”, all doors will unlock if any door automatically unlatch unless another RKE transmitter is
handle is grasped. Refer to “Remote Key Unlock” outside the vehicle and within 3 ft (1.5 m) of the deck lid.
under “Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
To Lock the Vehicle’s Doors
Features)” in the “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-
The vehicle doors can be locked by using the RKE
ter (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
• If you accidentally lock your RKE transmitter in the vehicle’s interior door panel.
vehicle using the door panel switch, ALL doors will
To Place an RKE Transmitter in the Vehicle for
unlock and the horn will chirp three times after all
Safekeeping – Vehicles Equipped with Keyless
doors are closed. If you do this three times, the system
Go only
will not chirp and the doors will remain locked on the
If you want to lock an RKE transmitter in your vehicle by
third attempt. To re-enable the system the vehicle must
using the door panel switch perform the following pro-
be unlocked with another valid RKE transmitter.
cedure:
To Enter the Trunk
1. With the desired RKE transmitter in the vehicle, press
Press the button on the left side of CHMSL, which is
the door lock switch located on the door panel. All doors
located on the deck lid.
will lock. When all doors are closed you will hear three
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your RKE transmitter chirps of the horn and the doors will unlock. This is the
in the trunk and try to close the deck lid, the deck lid will
same lock/unlock and chirping sound that you would 2. Insert the tip of the valet key (or alike) into the child
experience if you accidentally locked your RKE transmit- lock control and pull it upward.
ter in the vehicle.
NOTE: For valet key information, refer to “A Word
2. Open the door and repeat Step 1 two more times (three About Your Keys” in this section.
2
times total). The doors will remain locked; no audible
warnings will occur.
NOTE: Any RKE transmitter that is locked in the
vehicle either by a passive lock, another RKE lock, or the
door panel lock switch will be disabled from Keyless Go.
The disabled RKE transmitter(s) will be re-enabled after a
passive unlock or RKE unlock.
Child Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a Child
Protection Door Lock system.
Child Lock Control
To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock System
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
1. Open the rear door.
NOTE: When the Child Protection Door Lock system is • For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the the door lock plunger to the UNLOCK position, roll
outside door handle even though the inside door lock is down the window and open the door with the outside
in the unlocked position. door handle.
To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock
WARNING!
System
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
1. Open the rear door.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are 2. Insert the tip of the valet key (or alike) into the child
engaged. Failure to follow this warning may result in lock control and pull it downward.
serious injury or death.
NOTE:
• After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock sys-
tem, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows.
2
Child Lock Control

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
NOTE: After disengaging the Child Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the desired position. Power Window Switches
There are single window controls on each passenger door To open the window part way, press the window switch
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows. to the first detent and release it when you want the
The window controls will operate only when the ignition window to stop.
switch is in the ON or ACC position.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
WARNING!
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the
Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches
ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended
will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch
children, can become entrapped by the windows
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
while operating the power window switches. Such
door will cancel this feature.
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power window
AUTO-Down Feature switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the
The driver door power window switch and some model ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening
passenger door power window switches have an AUTO- either front door will cancel this feature. The time is
down feature. Press the window switch to the second programmable. Refer to “Delay Power Off to Accessories
detent, release, and the window will go down automati- Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer-
cally. Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC) – If Equipped” in Section 4.
AUTO-Up Feature with Anti–Pinch Protection — If programmable. Refer to “Delay Power Off to Accessories
Equipped Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer-
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
the window will go up automatically. formation Center (EVIC) – If Equipped” in Section 4. 2
To stop the window from going all the way up during the NOTE:
AUTO-up operation, push down on the switch briefly. • If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then stop. Remove
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the obstacle and use the window switch again to close
the first detent and release it when you want the window
the window.
to stop.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the power
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
window switches will remain active for 10 minutes after
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power window
switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. The time is
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Window Lockout Switch

The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
passenger doors. To disable the window controls, press
and release the window lockout button (setting it in the
DOWN position). To enable the window controls, press
and release the window lockout button again (setting it in Window Lockout Switch
the UP position).
Reset Wind Buffeting

Anytime the vehicle battery is disconnected or goes dead, Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
the AUTO-up function will be disabled. To reactivate the pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
AUTO-up feature, perform the following procedure after ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the 2
vehicle power is restored: windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
1. Pull the window switch up to close window com-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
detent to open the window completely and continue to sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pressing the TRUNK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the (RKE) transmitter twice within five seconds.
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
With the ignition switch in the ON position, the Trunk
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
switch will operate. indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
With the ignition switch in the LOCK position or the key
removed from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open sym-
bol will display until the trunk is closed.
Trunk Release Button

TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
2
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Trunk Emergency Release
Trunk Emergency Release
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
The trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergency
Some of the most important safety features in your
release handle. It is located on the inside of the trunk lid,
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
near the latch, and is coated so that it glows in a darkened
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, the
trunk. Pull on the handle to open the trunk.
front airbags for both the driver and front passenger, the
optional supplemental side curtain airbags for the driver
and passengers seated next to a window, and the optional Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
supplemental front seat-mounted side airbags. If you will on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
be carrying children too small for adult-size belts, your and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
seat belts also can be used to hold infant and child far away from home or on your own street.
restraint systems.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
Please pay close attention to the information in this can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
possible. ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
WARNING! be belted at all times.
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer Lap/Shoulder Belts
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other lap/shoulder belts.
passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
buckled up properly.
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision, the belt will

WARNING! (Continued)
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out. • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of 2
WARNING! your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision best.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, • Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri- suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
ously injured or killed. of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat sengers safe, too.
belts. • Two people should never be belted into a single
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
using a seat belt properly. another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
(Continued) Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt
adjust the front seat.
go around your lap.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Pulling Out the Lap/Shoulder Belt Latch Plate
Inserting Latch Plate into Buckle

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride you from injury during a collision. You are more 2
too high on your body, possibly causing internal likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
nearest you. are meant to be used together.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron-
gest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your

WARNING!
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
collision. abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-
sible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision,
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to
your authorized dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is

comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
Removing Slack from Belt
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system 2
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage

In the driver and front passenger seats, the shoulder belt Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
away from your neck. Push and fully depress the button prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
above the webbing to release the anchorage, then move it you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
up or down to the position that fits you best. anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to Seat Belt Pretensioners
position the belt away from your neck. The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
collision. These devices improve the performance of the
shoulder belt.
seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight around
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the the occupant in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
anchor point. occupants, including those in child restraints.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate. worn snugly and positioned properly.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the straint Controller (ORC). (Refer to information on Air-
latch plate. bags in this section). Like the front airbags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. After a collision that is severe
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners, both
folded webbing.
must be replaced.
Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert姞) 1. With all doors closed, and the ignition switch in any
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within position except ON or START, buckle the driver’s seat
60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed belt.
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
2
System (BeltAlert威) will alert the driver to buckle their
start the engine. Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to
seat belt. The driver should also instruct all other occu-
turn off and then proceed to the next step.
pants to buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is
triggered, the BeltAlert威 will continue to chime and flash NOTE: You must perform the following steps within
the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON
driver’s seat belt is buckled. The BeltAlert威 will be position.
reactivated if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than
ON position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s
5 mph (8 km/h).
seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds, ending
BeltAlert威 Programming with the seat belt buckled.
The BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn
authorized dealer or by performing the following steps:
on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while
NOTE: Chrysler LLC does not recommend deactivating re-buckling the seat belt. It may be necessary to retract
the BeltAlert威. the seat belt.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A How to Engage the Automatic Locking Mode
single chime will sound to signify that you have success-
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
fully completed the programming.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
the entire belt is extracted.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as
here a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
long as the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled.
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and
locked. However, the belt will still retract to remove slack
allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking mode
Locking mode and activate the Vehicle Sensitive (Emer-
any time a child safety seat is installed in a seating
gency) Locking mode.
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Seat belts
that have the Automatic Locking mode feature have a
distinctive label on the webbing. Children 12 years old
and younger should be properly restrained in the rear
seat whenever possible.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is tender and store it.
the best way to keep the baby safe. 2
WARNING!
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
the force if there is a collision. low and snug and in the recommended seating posi-
tions. Remove and store the extender when not
Seat Belt Extender
needed.
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental

Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag
This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s airbag is mounted in the center of
the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag is
mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove com-
partment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the
airbag covers.
Front Airbag Components

1 — Airbags
2 — Knee Bolsters
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal

regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This such as alarm lights, stereos, citizens band radios
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
2
etc.
that are based on collision severity.
This vehicle may also be equipped with supplemental
WARNING! side curtain airbags to protect the driver and passengers
• Do not put anything on or around the front airbag sitting next to a window and/or supplemental front
covers or attempt to open them. You may damage seat-mounted side airbags.
the airbags and you could be injured because the
airbags are no longer functional. These protective
covers for the airbag cushions are designed to
open only when the airbags are inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
(Continued)
If the vehicle is equipped with supplemental side curtain If the vehicle is equipped with supplemental front seat-
airbags, they are located above the side windows. Their mounted side airbags, they are marked with an SRS label
covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG. sewn into the outboard side of the seat.
Window Airbag SRS Label Location

NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open to allow airbag deployment.

• If your vehicle is equipped with supplemental • If your vehicle is equipped with supplemental
front seat-mounted side airbags, do not use acces- side curtain airbags, do not stack luggage or other 2
sory seat covers or place objects between you and cargo up high enough to block the location of the
the seat airbags; the performance could be ad- side curtain airbag. The area where the side cur-
versely affected and/or objects could be pushed tain airbag is located should remain free from any
into you, causing serious injury. obstructions.
• If your vehicle is equipped with supplemental • If your vehicle is equipped with supplemental
front seat-mounted side airbags, do not attach side curtain airbags, do not have any accessory
cupholders or any other objects on or around the items installed which will alter the roof, including
door. The inflating seat airbag could drive the adding a sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof
object into occupants, causing serious injury. racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or
screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not
(Continued) drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat

hooks in this vehicle. A clothing bar will impede the
proper performance of the curtain airbags.
Along with the seat belts, front airbags work with the
WARNING!
instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side curtain Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER
and seat airbags also work with seat belts to improve ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
occupant protection. front airbag. An airbag deployment could cause
severe injury or death to infants in that position.
While the seat belts are designed to protect you in many
types of collisions, the front airbags will deploy in
2. Children who are not big enough to wear the vehicle
moderate to severe frontal collisions. For vehicles so
seat belt properly should be secured in the rear seat in
equipped, the supplemental side curtain airbag and front
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. (Refer to
seat-mounted side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle
information on Child Restraints in this section.)
will also trigger in moderate to severe side collisions.
However, even in collisions where the airbags deploy, 3. Older children who do not use child restraints or
you need the seat belts to keep you in the correct position belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buck-
for the airbags to protect you properly. led up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the
shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag. 4. If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
1. Children 12 years old and younger should ride buck-
led up in the rear seat.
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child

WARNING!
restraint. (Refer to information on Child Restraints in this
section.) • Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work 2
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
6. All occupants should use their seat belts properly. Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate. • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during airbag deployment could cause seri-
8. If your vehicle has supplemental side curtain airbags ous injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back,
and/or supplemental front seat-mounted side airbags, comfortably extending your arms to reach the
do not lean against the door, as the airbags will inflate steering wheel or instrument panel.
forcefully into the space between you and the door. • If the vehicle has supplemental side curtain air-
9. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be bags and/or supplemental front seat-mounted side
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the airbags, they also need room to inflate. Do not lean
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in the ⬙If against the door or window. Sit upright in the
You Need Customer Assistance⬙ section. center of the seat.
Airbag System Components • Seat Belt Reminder Light

The airbag system consists of the following:
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Front Acceleration Sensors
• Side Remote Acceleration Sensors (if equipped)
• Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Airbag Warning Light
How the Airbag System Works
• Driver Airbag
• The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
• Front Passenger Airbag if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the
airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are de-
• Supplemental Side Curtain Airbags above Side Win-
signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation
dows (if equipped)
from direction provided by the ORC. The ORC will not
• Supplemental Front Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (if detect rollover.
equipped)
• For vehicles so equipped, the ORC also determines if a
• Steering Wheel and Column side impact is severe enough to deploy the supple-
mental side curtain airbag and/or supplemental front
• Instrument Panel
seat-mounted side airbag as required for each type of
• Interconnecting Wiring impact.
• The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic

WARNING!
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or ON positions. These include all of the Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru-
items listed above except the knee bolster, the instrument panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to 2
ment panel, and the steering wheel and column. If the protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
key is in the LOCK position, in the ACC position, or on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
not in the ignition, the airbags are not on and they will on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right
not inflate. away.
• The ORC also turns on the Airbag Warning
• The Driver and Front Passenger Airbag/Inflator
Light in the instrument panel for six to eight
Units are located in the center of the steering wheel
seconds as a self-check when the ignition is
and the passenger side of the instrument panel. When
first turned on. After the self-check, the
the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags, it
Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of nontoxic
a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the
gas is generated to inflate the front airbags. Different
Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continu-
airbag inflation rates may be possible based on colli-
ously. A single chime will sound if the light comes on
sion severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover and
again after initial start-up.
the upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to
their full size. The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 inflate the side curtain airbag. The inflating side cur-
ms. This is about half of the time that it takes to blink tain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner
your eyes. The bags then quickly deflate while helping out of the way and covers the window. The airbag
to restrain the driver and front passenger. The driver’s inflates in about 30 ms (about one-quarter of the time
front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the that it takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to
sides of the airbag. The passenger’s front airbag gas is injure you if you are not belted and seated properly, or
vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In if items are positioned in the area where the side
this way, the airbags do not interfere with your control curtain airbag inflates. This especially applies to chil-
of the vehicle. dren. The side curtain airbag is only about 3-1/2 in
(9 cm) thick when it is inflated.
• The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of
the driver and the front passenger and position every- • The Supplemental Front Seat-Mounted Side Airbags
one for the best interaction with the front airbag. are designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
When the ORC (with side impact option) detects a
• The Supplemental Side Impact SRS Side Curtain
collision requiring the front seat-mounted side airbag
Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side
to inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of the
collisions. When the ORC (with side impact option)
vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
detects a collision requiring the side curtain airbag to
inflate the front seat-mounted side airbag. The inflat-
inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of the
ing front seat-mounted side airbag pushes through the
vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
seam in the seat’s trim cover and opens into the space
between the occupant and the door. The airbag inflates • Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those
at a very high speed and with enough force to injure approved by Chrysler LLC/Mopar威.
you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if
• At no time should any supplemental restraint sys-
items are positioned in the area where the front
tem (SRS) component or SRS-related component or
2
seat-mounted side airbag inflates. This especially ap-
fastener be modified or replaced with any part
plies to children.
except those which are approved by Chrysler LLC/
The following requirements must be strictly adhered Mopar威.
to:
WARNING!
• Do not make any modifications to the front seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover in any Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
way. the front seat assembly, its related components, or
seat cover may inadvertently change the airbag de-
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers
ployment in case of a frontal crash. This could result
not designated for the specific model being re-
in death or serious injury to the driver or front seat
paired. Always use the correct seat cover specified
passenger if the vehicle is involved in an accident. A
for the vehicle.
modified vehicle may not comply with required
• Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS).
seat cover.
If a Deployment Occurs • As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
The airbag system is designed to deploy when the ORC particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
detects a moderate to severe collision to help restrain the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
driver and front passenger and then to immediately deflate. inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irrita-
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
tion, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system.
doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow
If you do have a collision that deploys the airbags, any or the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
all of the following may occur:
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra- airbags have been deployed. If you are involved in
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front another collision, the airbags will not be in place to
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The abra- protect you.
sions are similar to friction rope burns or those you
might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. WARNING!
They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are
Deployed airbags can’t protect you in another colli-
not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if
sion. Have the airbags replaced by an authorized
you haven’t healed significantly within a few days or if
dealer as soon as possible.
you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System Maintaining Your Airbag System

In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment,
with the vehicle stopped, and the vehicle communication WARNING!
network intact, and the power intact, the Enhanced
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system
2
Accident Response System performs the following func-
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
tions:
be injured because the airbags are not there to
• Cuts off fuel to the engine. protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
• Flashes hazard lights.
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
• Turns on the interior lights, which remain on as long as upper passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
the battery has power or until the ignition key is not modify the front bumper, vehicle body struc-
removed. ture, or frame.
• Unlocks the doors automatically. • You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
NOTE: The interior lights can only be deactivated if the equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster.
key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
driven. airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has airbags.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material — special handling may Event Data Recorder (EDR)
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param-
Airbag Warning Light
eters (see the following list) in an event data recorder
You will want to have the airbags ready to
prior to the moment of airbag deployment, or near
inflate for your protection in an impact. While
deployment, and up to a quarter second of high-speed
the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
deceleration data during and/or after airbag deploy-
nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
ment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys,
an authorized dealer service the system promptly:
or nearly deploys, and are otherwise unavailable.
• The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers
NOTE:
during the six to eight seconds when the ignition
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
switch is first turned ON.
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica-
• The light remains on or flickers after the six to eight tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
second interval. deployment.
• The light flickers or comes on and remains on while 2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
driving. recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a com- upon request. General data that does not identify par-
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be ticular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorpo-
used by Chrysler LLC and others to learn more about the ration in aggregate crash databases, such as those main-
possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order tained by the US government and various states. Data of 2
to assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition a potentially sensitive nature, such as would identify a
to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler LLC, such particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confi-
investigations may be requested by customers, insurance dentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed by
carriers, government officials, and professional crash Chrysler LLC to any third party except when:
researchers, such as those associated with universities,
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
and with hospital and insurance organizations.
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
Chrysler LLC (regardless of initiative), the company or its preserved.
designated representative will first obtain permission of
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler LLC
the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle (usually
product.
the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the elec-
tronic data stored, unless ordered to download data by a 3. Requested by police under a legal warrant.
court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a warrant).
4. Otherwise required by law.
A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity
Data parameters that may be recorded: • Transmission gear selection

• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for • Cruise control status
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the
• Traction/stability control status
airbag system
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System status
• Airbag disable light status (if equipped)
Child Restraints
• ⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
cycles and vehicle mileage)
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
• Airbag deployment level (if applicable) United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
• Impact acceleration and angle
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
• Seat belt status
Children 12 years and younger should ride properly
• Brake status (service and parking brakes) buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
• Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
the rear seats rather than in the front.
• Engine control status (including engine speed)
Infants and Child Restraints

WARNING!
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
can become a missile inside the vehicle. The force
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
2
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing, infant
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
carriers and convertible child seats.
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your • The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
size. to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
There are different sizes and types of restraints for vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
children from newborn size to the child almost large weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
child. held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to
“LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower restraint anchorage system. Refer to “LATCH — Child
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)” in this section. Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren)” in this section.
WARNING!
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
deployment could cause severe injury or death to child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a
infants in this position. belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-
positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
Older Children and Child Restraints lap/shoulder belt.
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
seatback should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child • Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug

WARNING!
as possible.
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a 2
collision. The child could be badly injured or
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind • A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
their back. used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child re-
NOTE: For additional information, refer to straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. ing passenger airbag, which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
restraint: collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
cause serious personal injury.
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure Anchors and Tether for CHildren)
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child
where you will use it before you buy it. restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
weight and height limits.
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the structure.
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now avail-
not work when you need it.
able. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
restraint manufacturer’s directions. having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail-

able for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all 2
the available attachments provided with your child re-
straint in any vehicle.
All three rear-seating positions have lower anchorages
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible
child seats. You should NEVER install LATCH-
compatible child seats so that two seats share a common
lower anchorage. If installing child seats in adjacent
rear-seating positions, or if your child restraints are not LATCH Anchorages
LATCH-compatible, install the restraints using the vehi-
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
cle’s seat belts.
System
We urge you to follow the manufacturer’s directions
carefully when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-
are provided with the child restraint system. facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
located at the rear of the seat cushion where it
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
meets the seatback and are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the
along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next,
surfaces. attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the
seat cover material. Then rotate the tether anchorage
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the
behind each rear seating position located in the
child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchor-
panel between the rear seatback and the rear
age, being careful to route the tether strap to provide the
window. These tether strap anchorages are
most direct path between the anchor and the child
under a plastic cover with this symbol on it.
restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with child restraint rearward and downward into the seat,
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or removing slack in the straps according to the child
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE:
WARNING!
• Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in Improper installation of a child restraint to the
the strap. LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or 2
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
• When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
when installing an infant or child restraint.
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
Belts
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch-
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
ing latch plates or Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs),
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through
the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a
the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This
locking clip. Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
plate will keep the belt tight; however, any seat belt
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be
system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasion-
played with, and never leave your child unattended in
ally and pull it tight if necessary.
the vehicle.
Seat belts with an automatic locking retractor have a buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times
distinctive label on the seat belt webbing. The seat belt to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
must be in the Automatic Locking mode in order to release button facing out.
enable a child restraint to be tightly installed. Refer to
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
“Automatic Locking Mode” in this section. A locking clip
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
should not be necessary once the automatic locking
to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
feature is enabled. Position the shoulder and lap belt on
the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
the child restraint. The automatic locking retractor is
plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make the
activated by first attaching the child seat, then pulling all
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
of the webbing out of the retractor, then allowing the
webbing to retract back into the retractor. Tighten web- To attach a child restraint tether strap:
bing. To release, simply unbuckle the seat belt by de-
1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the
pressing the button, allowing the webbing to retract into
seat where you are placing the child restraint.
the retractor.
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
NOTE: Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
the strap.
2
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Tether Strap Mounting Transporting Pets

Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint to a collision.
the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
tions.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS shown under “Engine Oil”, under “Maintenance Proce-
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in dures” in section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT
your vehicle. OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE
USED.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri- SAFETY TIPS
mental and should be avoided.
Transporting Passengers
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil AREA.
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, WARNING!
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
2
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
ously injured or killed.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
follow these safety tips:
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
using a seat belt properly. areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
Lock Your Vehicle
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended, even in your running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
own driveway or garage. Try to park your vehicle in a outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
well-lit area and never invite theft by leaving articles of
value exposed.
If you are required to drive with the trunk open, make Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
sure that all windows are closed and the climate control Vehicle
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the
Seat Belts
recirculation mode.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com- or retractor condition, replace the belt.
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
Airbag Warning Light
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
The light should come on and remain on for six to eight
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
Defroster Lights
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your beam indicator lights on the instrument panel. 2
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
Door Latches
inoperable.
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
Fluid Leaks
The Vehicle
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
Tires engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for located and corrected immediately.
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 ▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped . . . . . . 92
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 ▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
▫ Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror — ▫ Heated Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . 93
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . 94
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
䡵 Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威) —
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
▫ Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer — If Equipped . . 91
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
▫ Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And
▫ UConnect威 System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Approach Lighting — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 91
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 112 ▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

▫ Things You Should Know About Your ▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
UConnect威 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
䡵 Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 134
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . 135
䡵 Voice Recognition System (VR) —
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Entry (RKE) Transmitter To The Memory
▫ Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation . . . 122 Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 ▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 ▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With
Memory Seat Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
▫ Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
䡵 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Power Reclining Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . 140
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With ▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Auto Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
▫ SmartBeams — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Auto Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 ▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . 149
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 143 䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 150
3
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 䡵 Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
䡵 Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
䡵 Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights . . . . 145
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 ▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . 168
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 ▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . 171
䡵 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — ▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . 174
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . 160
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . 161 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 䡵 Rear Park Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ To Set a Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 䡵 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 ▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 ▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 185
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 ▫ Programming HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . 166 ▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . 189
▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

▫ Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 ▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
3
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off . . . . . . 196
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
▫ Opening Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
▫ Closing Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
▫ Rear Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
▫ Venting Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
▫ Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
䡵 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
▫ Trunk Mat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 ▫ Electric Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . 201

䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 䡵 Load Leveling System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 202
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical mirror adjustment. Adjust the mirror to center on
the view through the rear window. The mirror should be
adjusted while set in the day position (toward the wind-
3
shield).
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror

Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror — If Equipped

CAUTION!
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
dimming feature is activated. mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger-side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
Automatic Dimming Mirror

Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer — If Equipped

WARNING!
This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger-side glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn this feature
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away on or off by pressing the button at the base of the inside
than they really are. Relying too much on your rearview mirror. This feature is also available on the
passenger-side convex mirror could cause you to passenger outside mirror of mirrors equipped with turn 3
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your signal and approach lighting.
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
Outside Mirrors with Turn Signal and Approach
vehicle seen in the passenger-side convex mirror.
Lighting — If Equipped
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
and approach lighting contain four LEDs, which are
Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged. The
located in the upper outer corner of each mirror.
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions, full Three of the LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash
forward, full rearward and normal. with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and
rear of the vehicle. Turning on the hazard flashers will
also activate these LEDs.
The fourth (uppermost) LED supplies illuminated entry ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors
lighting, which turns on in both mirrors when you use will move slightly downward from the present position
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any when the vehicle is shifted into the REVERSE position.
door. This LED shines outward to illuminate the front The outside mirrors will then return to the original
and rear door handles. It also shines downward to position when the vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE
illuminate the area in front of the doors. position. Each stored memory setting will have an asso-
ciated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse position.
The illuminated entry lighting fades to off after about
30 seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not en-
ignition switch is turned ON from the LOCK position. abled when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled through the
NOTE: The approach lighting will not function when
customer programmable features in the Electronic Ve-
the shift lever is moved out of the PARK position.
hicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Tilt Mirrors in
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped Reverse” under “Customer-Programmable Features” un-
This additional feature provides automatic outside mir- der “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
ror positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the Section 4.
Power Mirrors After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door direction you want the mirror to move. Use the center off
trim panel next to the power door lock switch. A rotary position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror
knob selects the left mirror, right mirror or off position. position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Seat, you can use your RKE transmitter or the memory
3
switch on the driver’s door trim panel to return the
power mirrors to pre-programmed positions. Refer to
“Driver Memory Seat” in this section.
Heated Power Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature
is activated whenever you turn on the Electric Rear
Window Defroster. Refer to “Electric Rear Window De-
froster” under “Rear Window Features” in Section 4.
Power Mirror Control

Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect姞) —

An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. IF EQUIPPED
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and
NOTE: The sales code RER and REU radios contain an
swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on
integrated Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)
automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
system. Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for
UConnect威 system operating instructions for these ra-
dios. Radio sales code can be located on the lower right
corner of the Radio faceplate.
UConnect威 is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle
communications system. UConnect威 allows you to dial a
phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or ⬙Dial”
ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular phone’s audio is trans-
mitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnect威 system.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
NOTE: The UConnect威 system requires a cellular phone UConnect威 features Bluetooth威 technology - the global
equipped with the Bluetooth威 ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙ Ver- standard that enables different electronic devices to con-
sion 0.96 or higher. See the UConnect威 website for nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
supported phones. UConnect威 works no matter where you stow your cellu-
lar phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long
NOTE: For UConnect威 customer support, visit the
following websites:
as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the 3
vehicle’s UConnect威 system. The UConnect威 system
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the
system. Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
• www.jeep.com/uconnect English, Spanish, or French languages.
• or call 1–877–855–8400 Phone Button
The rearview mirror contains the microphone
UConnect威 allows you to transfer calls between the
for the system (depending on the type of
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
mirror and radio equipped), and either the
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
radio or the mirror has the two control buttons
for private conversation.
(PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button)
The UConnect威 system is driven through your that will enable you to access the system.
Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile” cellular phone.
Voice Recognition Button The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
Actual button location may vary with the ra- the UConnect威 system such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
dio. The individual buttons are described in the certain radios.
“Operation” section.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect威
The UConnect威 system can be used with any Hands-Free
system and to navigate through the UConnect威 menu
Profile certified Bluetooth威 cellular phone. See the
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect威 website for supported phones. If your cellu-
UConnect威 system prompts. You will be prompted for a
lar phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset
specific command and then guided through the available
Profile) you may not be able to use any UConnect威
options.
features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the
phone manufacturer for details. • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt or another
The UConnect威 system is fully integrated with the vehi-
prompt.
cle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect威 system
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control • For certain operations, compound commands can be
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
switch), if so equipped. ⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the To activate the UConnect威 system from idle, simply press
combined form of the voice command is given. You the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for
can also break the commands into parts and say each directions. All UConnect威 system sessions begin with a
part of the command when you are asked for it. For press of the PHONE button on the radio control head.
example, you can use the combined form voice com-
Cancel Command
mand ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ⬙Cancel⬙ and
3
combined form command into two voice commands:
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the
few instances the system will take you back to the
UConnect威 system works best when you talk in a
previous menu.
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you. Pair (Link) UConnect威 System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnect威 system, you must pair
Voice Command Tree
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled cellular phone.
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
Help Command
ence your cellular phone Owner’s Manual. The
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
UConnect威 website may also provide detailed instruc-
know your options at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following
tions for pairing.
the beep. The UConnect威 system will play all the options
at any prompt if you ask for help.
The following are general phone to UConnect威 system • You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
pairing instructions: priority level between one and seven, with one being
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven cellular
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
phones to your UConnect威 system. However, at any
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say given time, only one cellular phone can be in use,
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙ connected to your UConnect威 system. The priority
allows the UConnect威 system to know which cellular
• When prompted, after the beep, say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ and
phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the
follow the audible prompts.
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi- and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to UConnect威 system will use the priority three cellular
enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN lower priority cellular phone at any time (refer to
after the initial pairing process. ⬙Advanced Phone Connectivity⬙ in this section).
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to Dial by Saying a Number
give the UConnect威 system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
• The system will prompt you to say the number you or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
want to call. name in the phonebook, refer to ⬙Add Names to Your
UConnect威 Phonebook,⬙ in the phonebook.
• For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901⬙.
• The UConnect威 system will confirm the name and
• The UConnect威 system will confirm the phone num-
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
ber and then dial. The number will appear in the
may appear in the display of certain radios.
3
display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your UConnect威 Phonebook
Call by Saying a Name
NOTE: Adding names to the UConnect威 phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.⬙
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
person you want to call.
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and it is
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
recommended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previ-
⬙Robert⬙ instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
ously stored name entry in the UConnect威 phonebook
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
⬙Home,⬙ ⬙Work,⬙ ⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow Transfer From Mobile Phone
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
entry, if desired. UConnect威 automatically downloads names (text names)
and number entries from the mobile phone’s phonebook.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book Access
phonebook entry that you are adding.
Profile may support this feature. See UConnect威 website
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone- for supported phones.
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
• To call a name from downloaded (or UConnect威)
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a
main menu.
Name” section.
The UConnect威 system will allow you to enter up to 32
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
made to the UConnect威, for example, after you start
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
the vehicle.
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, UConnect威 automatically • A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-
downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook. loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the UConnect威.
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down- Bluetooth威. To use this feature, press the PHONE button
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest and say “Phonebook Download.” The system prompts,
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail- “Ready to accept “V” card entry via Bluetooth威…” The
able, the previous downloaded phonebook is available system is now ready to accept phonebook entries from
for use. your phone using the Bluetooth威 Object Exchange Profile
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
(OBEX). Please see your phone Owner’s Manual for 3
specific instructions on how to send these entries from
phone is accessible.
your phone.
• Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
NOTE:
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone-
• The phone handset must support Bluetooth威 OBEX
book.
transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
• Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
deleted on the UConnect威. These can only be edited on
are already connected to any system via Bluetooth威,
the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and
and you may see a message on the phone display that
updated to UConnect威 on the next phone connection.
the Bluetooth威 link is busy. In this case, the user must
Phonebook Download — Single Entry first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth威 connection to
If equipped and supported by your phone, UConnect威 the UConnect威 system, and then send the address
allows the user to download entries from their phone via
book entry via Bluetooth威. Please see your phone • Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
drop the Bluetooth威 connection.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
• If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it phonebook entry that you are editing.
will only use the first 24 characters.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
Edit UConnect威 Phonebook Entries you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
NOTE:
to the main menu.
• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion. ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
deleted or edited.
mobile and a home number, but you can add ”John
• Press the PHONE button to begin. Doe’s” work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙
feature.
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙ Delete UConnect威 Phonebook Entry
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
entry that you wish to edit. when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the PHONE button to begin. • Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙ • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish Delete/Erase “All” UConnect威 Phonebook Entries 3
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
from which you choose. To select one of the entries ⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
from the list, press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
• The UConnect威 system will ask you to verify that you
while the UConnect威 system is playing the desired
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
entry and say ⬙Delete.⬙
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
• After you enter the name, the UConnect威 system will
deleted.
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile, pager, or all. Say the designation you • Note that only the phonebook in the current language
wish to delete. is deleted.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be • The selected number will be dialed.
deleted or edited.
Phone Call Features
List All Names in the UConnect威 Phonebook The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect威 system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙ accessed through the UConnect威 system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
• The UConnect威 system will play the names of all the
have.
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone-
book entries, if available. Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
• To call one of the names in the list, press the VOICE
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
RECOGNITION button during the playing of the
UConnect威 system will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-
desired name, and say ⬙Call.⬙
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
NOTE: The user can also exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙ call. Press the PHONE button to accept the call. To reject
operations at this point. the call, press and hold the PHONE button until you hear
a single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
• The UConnect威 system will then prompt you as to the
rejected.
number designation you wish to call.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call to ⬙Toggling Between Calls⬙ in this section. To combine two
Currently in Progress calls, refer to ⬙Conference Call⬙ in this section.
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
To put a call on hold, press the PHONE button until you
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
cellular phone. Press the PHONE button to place the
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
3
current call on hold and answer the incoming call.
PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
NOTE: The UConnect威 system compatible phones in
Toggling Between Calls
the market today do not support rejecting an incoming
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user
press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep,
can only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
Making a Second Call While Current Call is in have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
Progress time.
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
Conference Call
press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
hold), press and hold the PHONE button until you hear
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
a double beep indicating that the two calls have been
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
To initiate three-way calling, press the VOICE RECOG- ⬙Redial.⬙
NITION button while a call is in progress, and make a
• The UConnect威 system will call the last number that
second phone call, as described under ⬙Making a Second
was dialed from your cellular phone.
Call While Current Call is in Progress.⬙ After the second
call has established, press and hold the PHONE button NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
until you hear a double beep, indicating that the two calls UConnect威 system.
have been joined into one conference call.
Call Continuation
Call Termination Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the PHONE UConnect威 system after the vehicle ignition key has been
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
continue on the UConnect威 system either until the call
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
cessation of the call on the UConnect威 system and
Redial transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
continue on the UConnect威 system for a certain dura- voice commands will be in that language.
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
NOTE: After every UConnect威 language change opera-
from the UConnect威 system to the mobile phone.
tion, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is
• An active call is automatically transferred to the usable. The paired phone name is not language-specific
mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF. and usable across all languages.
3
UConnect姞 System Features Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
Language Selection
reachable:
To change the language that the UConnect威 system is
using: • Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect威 system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
the name of the language you wish to switch to
follows:
English, Espanol, or Francais.
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.

WARNING!
⬙Emergency⬙ and the UConnect威 system will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num- Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and UConnect威 system to allow use of this vehicle feature
Mexico. in emergency situations, when the cell phone has
network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect威
NOTE:
system.
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Towing Assistance
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
If you need towing assistance:
not be applicable with the available cellular service
and area. • Press the PHONE button to begin.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
some systems. To do this, press the PHONE button ⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
and say ‘Setup’, followed by ‘Emergency’.
• The UConnect威 system does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the cell phone directly.
NOTE: Working with Automated Systems

• The towing assistance number dialed is based on the This method is used in instances where one generally has
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528- to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14- navigating through an automated telephone system.
3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
You can use your UConnect威 system to access a voice mail
Mexico City in Mexico).
system or an automated service, such as a paging service or
3
• If supported, this number may be programmable on automated customer service line. Some services require
some systems. To do this, press the PHONE button immediate response selection. In some instances, that may
and say “Setup”’, followed by “Towing Assistance”. be too quick for use of the UConnect威 system.
Paging When calling a number with your UConnect威 system
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can press
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the sequence
work properly with the UConnect威 system. you wish to enter, followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For
example, if required to enter your PIN followed with a
Voice Mail Calling
pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can press the VOICE RECOGNI-
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
TION button and say, ⬙3 7 4 6 # Send.⬙ Saying a number,
with Automated Systems.⬙
or sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send,⬙ is also to be
used for navigating through an automated customer Barge In - Overriding Prompts

service center menu structure, and to leave a number on The “Voice Recognition” button can be used when you
a pager. wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
You can also send stored UConnect威 phonebook entries
prompt is asking ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
a...,⬙ you could press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
and say, ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to select that option without
call and then press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
and say, “Send.” The system will prompt you to enter the
name or number and say the name of the phonebook Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
entry you wish to send. The UConnect威 system will then Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
send the corresponding phone number associated with from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect威 sys-
the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone. tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
NOTE: • Press the PHONE button to begin.
• You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
network configurations. This is normal.
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The UConnect威 system will
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time play the current confirmation prompt status and you
out settings that are too short and may not allow the will be given the choice to change it.
use of this feature.
Phone and Network Status Indicators NOTE: Certain brands of cellular phones do not send
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display the dial ring to the UConnect威 system to play it on the
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
your cellular phone, the UConnect威 system will provide situation, after successfully dialing a number the user
notification to inform you of your phone and network may feel that the call did not go through even though the
status when you are attempting to make a phone call call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will 3
using UConnect威. The status is given for roaming, net- hear the audio.
work signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad When you mute the UConnect威 system, you will still be
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone able to hear the conversation coming from the other
keypad and still use the UConnect威 system (while dial- party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
ing via the cellular phone keypad, the user must exercise order to mute the UConnect威 system:
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By • Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button.
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s • Following the beep, say ⬙Mute.⬙
audio system. The UConnect威 system will work the same In order to un-mute the UConnect威 system:
as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
• Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button.
• Following the beep, say ⬙Mute off.⬙
Advanced Phone Connectivity List Paired Cellular Phone Names

Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone • Press the PHONE button to begin.
The UConnect威 system allows ongoing calls to be trans-
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
ferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect威 system
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your UConnect威 paired cellular phone to the • When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
UConnect威 system or vice versa, press the VOICE REC-
• The UConnect威 system will play the phone names of
OGNITION button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
UConnect威 System and Cellular Phone phone being announced, press the VOICE RECOGNI-
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different TION button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙ the next two sections for an alternate way to “select”
with one electronic device at a time. or “delete” a paired phone.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between a UConnect威 paired cellular phone
and the UConnect威 system, follow the instructions de-
scribed in your cellular phone User’s Manual.
Select Another Cellular Phone Delete UConnect威 Paired Cellular Phones

This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the UConnect威 system.
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the
3
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts.
prompts.
• You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
• You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
at any time while the list is being played, and then
at any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone that you wish to select.
choose the phone you wish to delete.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
Things You Should Know About Your UConnect姞
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
System
UConnect威 system will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately UConnect威 Tutorial
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle. To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
PHONE button and say “UConnect威 Tutorial.”
Voice Training This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect威
To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default
system Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
training mode, follow one of the two following proce-
procedure and follow the prompts.
dures:
Voice Recognition (VR)
From outside the UConnect威 mode (e.g., from radio
mode): • For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
• Press and hold the VOICE RECOGNITION button for
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
five seconds until the session begins, or,
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the
⬙Setup, Voice Training⬙ command. • Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
you.
UConnect威 system. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked • Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
with the engine running, all windows closed, and the during a voice recognition period.
blower fan switched off.
• Performance is maximized under: • It is not recommended to store similar sounding

names in the UConnect威 phonebook.
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• Phonebook (Downloaded and UConnect威 Local) name
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not
• low road noise, similar.
3
• smooth road surface, • You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). ⬙800⬙ must be
spoken ⬙eight-zero-zero.⬙
• fully closed windows,
• Even though international dialing for most number
• dry weather condition.
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking number combinations may not be supported.
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
cents, the system may not always work for some.
compromised with the convertible top down.
• When navigating through an automated system such
Far End Audio Performance
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙Send.⬙ • Audio quality is maximized under:
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is • low-to-medium blower setting,
not in motion is recommended.
• low-to-medium vehicle speed, • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be

compromised with the convertible top down.
• low road noise,
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
• smooth road surface,
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
• fully closed windows, the UConnect威 system. When this happens, the connec-
tion can generally be re-established by switching the
• dry weather conditions, and
phone off/on. Your cellular phone is recommended to
• operation from the driver’s seat. remain in Bluetooth威 ON mode.
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness Power-Up
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
not the UConnect威 system. ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.
• Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
3
3
Voice Commands Voice Commands

Primary Alternate(s) Primary Alternate(s)
zero call
one cancel
two confirmation prompts
three continue
four delete
five dial
six download
seven edit
eight emergency
nine English
star (*) erase all
plus (+) Espanol
pound (#) Francais
add location help
all home
Voice Commands Voice Commands

Primary Alternate(s) Primary Alternate(s)
language return to main menu return or main menu
list names select phone select
list phones send 3
mobile set up phone settings or phone
mute set up
mute off towing assistance
new entry transfer call
no UConnect威 Tutorial
pager try again
pair a phone voice training
phone pairing pairing work
phonebook phone book yes
previous
record again
redial
General Information VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (VR) — IF

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and EQUIPPED
Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation
This Voice Recognition system allows you to
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
the party responsible for compliance could void the player, and a memo recorder.
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
• This device must accept any interference received, the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com-
including interference that may cause undesired mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
operation. raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions and all attention should be
kept on the roadway ahead. Failure to do so may
result in an accident causing serious injury or death.
When you press the VR hard-key, you will hear a beep. These commands are universal and can be used from any
The beep is your signal to give a command. menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of For example, if you are in the disc menu and you are
options. listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from the
disc menu or from the FM radio menu.
3
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists
options, press the VR hard-key, listen for the beep, and When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
say your command. a normal speaking volume.
Pressing the VR hard-key while the system is speaking is The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
known as “barging in.” The system will be interrupted dows are closed, and the heater/air-conditioning fan is
and after the beep you can add or change commands. set to low.
This will become helpful once you start to learn the
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
options.
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
To hear the first available Menu, press the VR hard-key
“Help”, or “Main Menu”.
and say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
Commands In this mode, you can say the following commands:

The Voice Recognition system understands two types of
• “Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
commands. Universal commands are available at all
times. Local commands are available if the supported • “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
radio mode is active.
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
Changing the Volume
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard-key.
Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”). Wave — If Equipped)
To switch to the AM band say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
this mode, you may say the following commands:
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recogni-
tion system is speaking. Please note the volume setting • “Frequency” (to change the frequency)
for VR is different then the audio system.
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
Main Menu
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard-key. You may
say “Main Menu” to switch to the main menu. • “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Radio FM • “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)

To switch to the FM band say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Frequency” (to change the frequency)
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station) 3
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
Disc
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
To switch to the disc mode say “Disc”. In this mode, you
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio • “Track” (#) (to change the track)
To switch to satellite radio mode say “Sat” or “Satellite
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com-
mands: • “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
spoken number)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
Memo • “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos)

To switch to the voice recorder mode say “Memo”. In this — During the playback you may press the VR hard-
mode, you may say the following commands: key to stop playing memos. You proceed by saying one
of the following commands:
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording you may press the VR hard-key to stop − “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
recording. You proceed by saying one of the following
− “Next” (to play the next memo)
commands:
− “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
− “Save” (to save the memo)
− “Delete” (to delete a memo)
− “Continue” (to continue recording)
• “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
− “Delete” (to delete the recording)
System Setup Voice Training

To switch to system setup say “Setup”. In this mode, you For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
may say the following commands: nizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect威
system Voice Training feature may be used.
• “Language English”
1. Press the VR hard-key, say “System Setup” and once
• “Language French”
you are in that menu then say “Voice Training.” This will
3
• “Language Spanish” train your own voice to the system and will improve
recognition.
• “Tutorial”
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
• “Voice Training”
UConnect威 System. For best results, the Voice Training
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the VR session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
hard-key first and wait for the beep before speaking the engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
“Barge In” commands. switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
SEATS
Power Seats
The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of
the seat near the floor. Use this switch to move the
driver’s seat up or down, forward or rearward or to
recline the seat. The passenger’s seat will move up or
down, forward or rearward.
Power Seat Switch

The recliner control is located on the outboard side of the

WARNING!
seat.
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust 3
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat as it may
cause damage to the seat controls.
Power Reclining Seats

The recline control is used to adjust the position of the Power Seat Recline Switch
seatback. To adjust the seatback forward, move the
control toward the front of the vehicle. To move the
seatback rearward, move the control toward the rear of
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Lumbar Support
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. Turn the control lever for-
ward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired
amount of lumbar support. Lumbar Support Control Lever
Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Adjust the restraint so
that the upper edge is as high as practical. To raise it, pull
upward on the head restraint. To lower it, depress the Heated Seats — If Equipped
button on the post guide and push downward on the This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats.
head restraint.
The controls for each front seat are located near the
bottom center of the instrument panel.
3
Adjustable Head Restraint
Front Heated Seat Switch

On vehicles equipped with rear heated seats, the seats After turning ON the ignition, Press the switch once to
closest to the doors are heated. The controls for these select High level heating. Press the switch a second time
seats are located on the rear of the center console. to select Low level heating. Press the switch a third time
to shut Off the heating elements. Amber indicators in the
switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicators
will illuminate for High, one for Low, and none for Off.
If the High level heating is selected, the system will
automatically switch to Low level heating after 30 min-
utes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of
indicators illuminated changes from two to one, indicat-
ing the change. Operation on the Low setting also turns
Off automatically after 30 minutes.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
Rear Heated Seat Switch
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion, or other physical conditions must exer- 3
cise care when using the seat heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat.
Folding Rear Seats
Folding Rear Seat When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
additional storage area. Pull on the loops shown in the seatback above the seat strap.
illustration to fold down either or both seatbacks. These
loops can be tucked away when not in use.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED

WARNING!
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
position, the seat will not provide the proper settings for the driver seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steering
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury. column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio station
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the presets.
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down NOTE: Only one Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-
position) should not be used as a play area by ter can be linked to each of the memory positions.
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in an accident. Children The memory switch is located on the driver’s door trim
should be seated and using the proper restraint panel. The switch contains an (S) button to activate the
system. memory save function. It also contains a rocker switch
labeled with the number (1) and the number (2). The
rocker switch allows the driver to recall either of two
pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the appro-
priate side of the switch.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-

ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column [if
equipped], and radio station presets).
3. Press and release the SET (S) button on the memory
switch.
3
4. Within five seconds, press and release the memory
button 1 or 2. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) (if equipped) will display which memory position
has been set.
Memory Switch NOTE:

• Memory is not linked to Passive Entry (if equipped).
Programming The Memory Feature
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
existing profile from memory.
memory profile.
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
1. Turn your ignition to the ON position.
• The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature accordingly. ⬙Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in
can be enabled through the EVIC (if equipped). Refer the instrument cluster on vehicles equipped with the
to “Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea- EVIC.
tures)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
4. Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter
(EVIC)” in Section 4.
within 10 seconds.
Linking and Unlinking the Remote Keyless Entry
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your
(RKE) Transmitter to the Memory Feature
memory settings by pressing the SET (S) button followed
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one
by the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter in Step 4
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the
above.
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
Memory Position Recall
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the follow-
ing: NOTE:
• The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory posi-
1. Remove key from ignition.
tions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in
2. Select desired memory profile 1 or 2. PARK, a message will display in the EVIC (if
equipped).
3. Once the profile has been recalled, press and release
the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then press and • The driver’s seat belt must be unbuckled to recall
release the side of the rocker switch labeled 1 or 2 memory positions.
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available with Memory Seat
MEMORY button number 1 on the driver’s door or the Only)
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
memory position 1. enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
MEMORY button number 2 on the driver’s door or the The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
3
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
memory position 2. key from the ignition switch.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the • When you remove the key from the ignition switch,
MEMORY buttons (S, 1, or 2) on the driver’s door during the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60 mm)
a recall. When a recall is cancelled, the driver seat, side rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or
mirror, adjustable pedals (if equipped), and power tilt equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The
and telescopic steering column (if equipped) stop mov- seat will return to its previously set position when you
ing. A delay of one second will occur before another recall insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of
can be selected. the LOCK position.
• When you remove the key from the ignition switch,
the driver seat will move to a position 0.3 in (7.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is
between 0.9 in and 2.7 in (22.7 mm and 67.7 mm) TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its Two latches must be released to open the hood.
previously set position when you insert the key into
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
the ignition switch and turn it out of the LOCK
of the instrument panel.
position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be en-
abled or disabled through the programmable features in
the EVIC. Refer to “Automatically Move Seat Back on
Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer- Hood Release Lever
Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the close it. Lower the hood, until it is open approximately
center front edge of the hood. 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should secure both
latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully
closed, with both latches engaged.
3
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
Hood Safety Catch The headlight switch is located on the left side of
Use the hood prop rod (if equipped) to secure the hood in the instrument panel. This switch controls the
the open position.
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
lights and fog lights. Turn it to the second detent for headlight, parking light
and instrument panel light operation.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO (A) position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the
ignition switch OFF. To turn the automatic system off,
move the headlight switch out of the AUTO (A) position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
Headlight Switch lights will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On with Wipers (Available with Auto and automatically switches from high beams to low
Headlights Only) beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
To Activate
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In 1. Select “Automatic High Beams — ON” through the
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are EVIC. Refer to “Automatic High Beams,” under “Per- 3
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. sonal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” un-
der “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on
Section 4.
or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) (if equipped). Refer to ”Headlights On with 2. Rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
Wipers,” under “Personal Settings (Customer- AUTO (A) position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to the high beam position. Refer to “Mul-
SmartBeams — If Equipped tifunction Lever” in this section.
The SmartBeam system provides increased forward light-
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
ing at night by automating high beam control through
at or above 25 mph (40 km/h).
the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside
rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light
To Deactivate Headlight Time Delay

Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
SmartBeam system. for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
vehicle in an unlit area.
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the
headlights from the high beam to the low beam position. To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the
2. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise from the AUTO
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins
(A) to the ON position.
when the headlight switch is turned off.
NOTE: Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
If you turn the headlights, park lights, or ignition switch
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause
ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).
Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the windshield If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
or camera lens will cause the system to function turn off in the normal manner.
improperly.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles Fog Lights — If Equipped

equipped with the EVIC. Refer to “Delay Turning Head- The front fog light switch is built into the head-
lights Off,” under “Personal Settings (Customer- light switch. To activate the front fog lights, turn
Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle In- on the parking lights or the low beam headlights
formation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4. and press the headlight switch. To turn off the front fog
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
lights, either press the headlight switch a second time or 3
turn off the headlight switch.
The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime
Running Lights whenever the ignition switch is ON, the An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
headlights are off and the parking brake is off. The when the fog lights are turned on.
headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
driving.
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
Lights-On Reminder high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
Multifunction Lever Turn Signals

The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn Move the multifunction lever up or down and the
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The corresponding turn signal indicator in the instrument
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the cluster flashes to show proper operation of the front and
steering column. rear turn signal lights.
Moving the multifunction lever up or down also causes
the corresponding turn signal indicator in the outside
mirror (if so equipped) to flash. For details, refer to
“Outside Mirrors with Turn Signal & Approach Light-
ing” under “Mirrors” in this Section.
You can also signal a lane change by moving the multi-
function lever partially up or down without moving
beyond the detent. Releasing the lever at the detent will
provide three flashes.
If either indicator has a very fast flash rate, check for an
inoperative outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light
Multifunction Lever
when the multifunction lever is moved, see your autho-
rized dealer for service.
NOTE: A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
EVIC (if equipped) and a continuous chime will sound if transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is
the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turned fully upward, past the second detent.
turn signal on.
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
3
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-to-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and
remain on until the multifunction lever is released.
Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights
Overhead Console
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned on by pressing the
lens. Press the lens a second time to turn the light off.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when
Interior Lights will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened. and, if so equipped, the lighting in the door map pockets
and cupholders.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is Dome Light Position
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
because a door is open. This includes the glove box light, lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
but not the trunk light. To restore interior light operation, position.
either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
switch.
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF
Dimmer Control position. The interior lights will remain off when the
The dimmer control is part of the doors are open.
headlight switch and is located on the
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
left side of the instrument panel. With
Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.
the parking lights or headlights on,
This feature brightens all text displays such as the
rotating the dimmer control upward
odometer, EVIC (if equipped), and radio when the park-
ing lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers detent, past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper
and washer when the ignition switch is in the ON operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
position. The multifunction lever is located on the left settings for high speed wiper operation.
side of the steering column.
CAUTION! 3
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the wind-
shield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in
any position other than off.
Intermittent Wiper System

Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be-
tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc-
tion lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the multifunction lever to select the desired delay
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
interval. There are six delay settings which allow you to
regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle Windshield Washers
every second to a maximum of approximately 23 seconds To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
between cycles. completely (toward the steering column) and hold it for
as long as washer spray is desired.
WARNING!
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
could lead to an accident. You might not see other two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the intermittent interval previously selected.
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
windshield with the defroster before and during
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles
windshield washer use.
and then turn off.
Mist Feature Headlights On with Wipers (Available with Auto
Lightly push the multifunction lever inward (toward the Headlights Only)
steering column) to activate a single wipe cycle to clear When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
will continue to operate until you release the multifunc- if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
tion lever. addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on setting 5 or 6 if you desire more sensitivity. Place the
or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center multifunction lever in the off position when not using the
(EVIC) (if equipped). Refer to ”Headlights On with system.
Wipers,” under “Personal Settings (Customer-
NOTE:
• The rain sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper speed is in the low or high position.
3
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
• The rain sensing feature may not function properly
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind-
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. This
shield.
feature is especially useful for road splash or over spray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate • Use of Rain-X威 or products containing wax or silicone
the end of the multifunction lever to one of the six may reduce rain sensor performance.
intermittent wiper settings to activate this feature.
• The rain sense feature can be turned on and off
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the through the EVIC (if equipped). Refer to “Personal
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” under
sensitive and wiper delay position 6 is the most sensitive. “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
Choose setting 3 or 4 for normal rain conditions. Choose Section 4.
setting 2 or 1 if you desire less wiper sensitivity. Choose
The rain sensing system has protective features for the TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
following conditions: upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
• Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The rain sensing
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
feature will not operate when the ignition is first
the steering column.
switched ON, and the vehicle is stationary, and the
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, or
the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph
(0 km/h), or the outside temperature rises above
freezing.
• Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The rain sensing feature will
not operate when the ignition is ON, and the trans-
mission shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position, and
the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h), unless
the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved
or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL
position.
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
outward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering — IF EQUIPPED
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
column in position, push the control handle inward until steering column lever is located below the multifunction 3
fully engaged. lever on the steering column.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. The
telescoping adjustment must be locked while driv-
ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or
driving without the telescoping adjustment locked
could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering

To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
desired. seat position. This feature allows both the brake and
accelerator pedal to move toward or away from the
driver to provide improved position with the steering
Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
wheel. The switch is located on the front side of the
transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door
driver’s seat cushion side shield.
trim panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to
pre-programmed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in this section.
WARNING!
Moving the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-
umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the ve-
hicle is stopped.
• The pedals can be adjusted while driving.

• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control is on.
One of the following messages will display in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if
equipped) if a pedal adjustment is attempted when the
3
system is locked out: “Adjustable Pedal Disabled —
Cruise Control Engaged” or “Adjustable Pedal Dis-
abled — Vehicle In Reverse.”
Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Adjustable Pedals Switch transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door
Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward trim panel to return the adjustable pedals to pre-
(toward the front of the vehicle). programmed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in this section.
Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL

When engaged, Electronic Speed Control takes over the
accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
1 — CANCEL
The Electronic Speed Control lever located on the right 2 — RESUME ACCEL
side of the steering wheel operates the system. 3 — ON/OFF
4 — SET DECEL
To Activate To Set At A Desired Speed

Push and release the ON/OFF button located When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
on the end of the Electronic Speed Control lever downward to SET DECEL and release. Remove
lever. The indicator light in the instrument your foot from the accelerator pedal and the vehicle will
cluster will illuminate to show that the speed operate at the selected speed.
control system is on. To turn the system off, push and
NOTE:
3
release the ON/OFF button again. The system and the
• Electronic Speed Control will only function in 3rd, 4th,
indicator light will turn off.
or 5th gear when in the Autostick威 mode (if
equipped).
WARNING!
• The Electronic Speed Control may not engage if a
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
different size tire is installed on one wheel, such as the
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
compact spare tire.
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the Electronic Speed Control system off when
you are not using it.
To Deactivate To Vary the Speed Setting

The system will disable Electronic Speed Control without When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
erasing the memory if you: crease speed by pushing up and holding the Electronic
Speed Control lever in RESUME ACCEL. When the
• Softly tap the brake pedal,
Electronic Speed Control lever is released, a new set
• Depress the brake pedal, or speed will be established.
• Pull the Electronic Speed Control lever toward you to Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to RESUME
CANCEL. ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed
increase. Each time the Electronic Speed Control lever is
Pushing and releasing the ON/OFF button or turning off
tapped speed increases, so tapping the Electronic Speed
the ignition erases the set speed from memory.
Control lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph
To Resume Speed (4.8 km/h), etc.
If you deactivated the Electronic Speed Control without
To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is set,
erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle
push down and hold the Electronic Speed Control lever
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h) you can resume the
in SET DECEL. Release the Electronic Speed Control
previous set speed. To do so, push the lever upward to
lever when the desired speed is reached, and a new set
RESUME ACCEL and release. Then remove your foot
speed will be established.
from the accelerator pedal.
Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to SET DE-

WARNING!
CEL once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed
decrease. Each time the Electronic Speed Control lever is Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
tapped, speed decreases. system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you
To Accelerate For Passing
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
could lose control. An accident could be the result. 3
Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
Using Electronic Speed Control on Hills slippery.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
moderate hills is normal. EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
The automatic transmission will downshift while climb- convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
ing uphill or descending downhill. This downshift is on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
necessary to maintain vehicle set speed. safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur, so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in

WARNING!
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes an infrared • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you. system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibil-
NOTE:
ity to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
apply limited braking or acceleration automatically to conditions. Your complete attention is always re-
maintain a preset following distance, while matching quired while driving to maintain safe control of
the speed of the vehicle ahead. your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in an accident or serious personal injury.The
ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (i.e., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING!

• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions You should switch off the ACC system:
into account, and may be limited upon adverse • When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
sight distance conditions. sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situations
• Does not predict the lane curvature or the move- (i.e., in highway construction zones). 3
ment of preceding vehicles and will not compen-
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
sate for such changes. when driving on roads that are winding, icy,
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing downhill slopes; and when towing a trailer.
distance warnings. • When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
• May not detect a vehicle ahead when strong light constant speed.
(for example, sunrise or sunset) is directly shining
Failure to follow these warnings can result in an
on the front of the vehicle.
accident or serious personal injury.
• Can only apply a maximum of 25% of the vehicle’s
braking capability, and will not bring the vehicle
to a complete stop.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control lever (located on the right side of the
• Adaptive cruise control mode for maintaining an
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode for cruising
at a constant preset speed. For additional information,
refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode”
in this section. Note: The system will not react to
preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode
selected.
You can change the mode by using the control lever. The
two control modes function differently. Always confirm
which mode is selected.
1 — DISTANCE SETTING
2 — CANCEL
3 — RESUME/ACCEL
4 — ON/OFF/MODE
5 — SET/DECEL
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) • When pushing the RESUME/ACCEL switch without a
You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above previously set speed in memory.
25 mph (40 km/h).
To Activate
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, Push and release the ON/OFF/MODE button located on
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) dis- the end of the speed control lever. The ACC menu in the
plays “ACC READY.” EVIC displays “ACC READY.”
3
When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays “CRUISE
OFF.”
NOTE: You cannot enable ACC under the following
conditions:
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is set.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE-
VERSE, or NEUTRAL.
• When the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) is
switched off.
To turn the system OFF, push and release the ON/OFF/

MODE button again. At this time, the system will turn off
and the EVIC will display “CRUISE OFF.”
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could acciden-
tally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have an accident.
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
To Set a Desired Acc Speed not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the speed. If this occurs:
lever downward (SET/DECEL) and release. The EVIC
will display the set speed. • The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the EVIC.
• The system will not be controlling the distance be- • You softly tap the brake pedal.
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
• You depress the brake pedal.
speed will only be determined by the position of the
accelerator pedal. • You pull the speed control lever toward you to CAN-
CEL.
• The Electronic Stability Program/Traction Control
3
System (ESP/TCS) activates.
To Cancel
The system will disable ACC without erasing the
memory if:
To Turn Off
WARNING!
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if: The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
• You push and release the ON/OFF/MODE button.
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
• You turn off the ignition. road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. This
• You switch off ESP.
could cause an accident and/or serious injury.
To Resume Speed
Push the lever upward (RESUME/ACCEL) and release. To Vary the Speed Setting
Then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by lifting
EVIC will display the last set speed. and holding the lever up (RESUME/ACCEL). If the lever
is continually held, the set speed will continue to increase
in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments until the lever is released.
The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display.
Tapping the lever up once will result in a 1 mph (1 km/h) NOTE:

increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the lever • When you use the lever to decelerate, if the engine’s
results in an increase of 1 mph (1 km/h). braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to
reach the set speed, the brake system will automati-
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
cally slow the vehicle.
pushing and holding the lever down (SET/DECEL). If
the lever is continually held, the set speed will continue • The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
3
to decrease in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments until the lever hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
EVIC display. may occur while climbing uphill or descending down-
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to main-
Tapping the lever down once will result in a 1 mph
tain set speed.
(1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the lever results in a decrease of 1 mph (1 km/h).
Setting the Following Distance in ACC To change the distance setting, push the lever away from
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by you (DISTANCE) and release. Each time this is done, the
varying the distance setting between long, medium, and distance setting adjusts between long, medium, and
short. Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, short.
ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead.
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
This distance setting displays in the EVIC.
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the EVIC displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indi-
cator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto-
matically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of
the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
1 — Sensor Bars. Default Distance Setting is Three Bars = Long.

• The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph braking capacity. When this occurs, you should immedi-
(24 km/h) and the system automatically disengages ately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe
itself. distance from the vehicle ahead.
• The distance setting is changed.
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on 3
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“ATTENTION” will flash in the EVIC and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu CRUISE OFF

The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The
− When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument
“CRUISE OFF.”
cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer. The
information it displays depends on ACC system status.
Press the MENU button (located on the steer-
ing wheel) repeatedly until one of the follow-
ing displays in the EVIC:
Menu
Button
ACC READY ACC SET

− When ACC is activated, the display will read “ACC − When ACC is set, the set speed will display.
READY.”
1 — Sensed Vehicle Indicator

2 — Set Speed
3 — Your Vehicle
4 — Following Distance Setting: Three Bars = Long; Two Bars =
Medium; One Bar = Short.
The set speed will continue to display in place of the The ACC SET screen will display once again if any ACC
odometer reading when changing the EVIC display activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
while ACC is set.
• Set speed change
• Distance setting change
• System cancel
• Acquisition/loss of Target
• Driver override
• System off
• Proximity warning
• ACC warning
The EVIC will return to the last display selected
after five seconds of no ACC activity.
Display Warnings and Maintenance

ACC Blinded Warning
The ACC Blinded Warning will display when conditions
temporarily limit system performance. This most often
occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow, fog,
heavy rain, or when driving into direct sunlight (sunrise
3
or sunset). The ACC system may also become tempo-
rarily blinded due to obstructions, such as dirt or ice. In
these cases, the EVIC will display “ACC Blinded” and
the system will deactivate.
NOTE: If the ACC Blinded Warning is active Normal

(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is still available. For addi-
tional information refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control Mode” in this section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should • Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
an obstruction. The sensor is located behind the grille, damage the sensor lens.
slightly offset from the center of the grille.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor or the
sensor mount. Doing so could cause an ACC system
malfunction or failure and require a sensor realign-
ment.
• If the sensor is damaged due to an accident, see your
authorized dealer for service.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
ACC Sensor Location longer present, the system will return to the “CRUISE
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor- OFF” state and will resume function by simply reactivat-
tant to note the following maintenance items: ing it.
NOTE: Installing a vehicle front-end protector or an

aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC
operation.
ACC Unavailable Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays ⬙ACC
3
UNAVAILABLE,⬙ there may be a temporary malfunction
that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be tempo-
rarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following a key cycle. If the problem persists, see
your authorized dealer.
Service ACC Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “SERVICE
ACC,” it indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Precautions While Driving with ACC

In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect-
edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Adding a Trailer Hitch
The weight of a trailer hitch may affect the performance
of ACC. If there is a noticeable change in performance
following the installation of a hitch, such as reduced
detection range, please see your authorized dealer for
service.
Offset Driving Turns and Bends
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is In turns or bends, ACC may detect a vehicle ahead too
offset from your direct line of travel. There will not be late or too early. This may cause your vehicle to brake late
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle or unexpectedly. Give extra attention in curves and be
may move in and out of the line of travel, which can ready to apply the brakes if necessary. Be sure to select an
cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly. appropriate speed while driving in curves.
Using ACC on Hills

When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor-
mance may be limited.
3
ACC may occasionally provide braking and/or a driver

alert that you consider unnecessary. This may be the
system’s response to signs, guardrails, and other station-
ary objects in a curve. This may also occur at the base of
dramatic hills. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
Lane Changing
ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it will not until it may be too late to take action. ACC will
not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane.
There will not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing
vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the
brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There will not be suffi-
cient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Stationary Objects and Vehicles General Information

ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations Classification Specifications:
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
21 C.F.R part 1040.10 & 1040.11
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary. DIN EN 60825-1:2003
IEC 60825-1:2001
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode

WARNING!
In addition to adaptive cruise control mode, a normal
(fixed speed) cruise control mode is available for cruising In the normal cruise control mode, the system will
at fixed speeds. The Normal cruise control mode is not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requir- warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
ing the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise control even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 25 mph the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-
(40 km/h). vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to maintain a
safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
To change modes, press and hold the ⬙ON/OFF/MODE⬙
ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected.
button for at least one second in either the OFF state or
the READY state. ⬙Normal Cruise Ready⬙ will be dis-
To set a Desired Speed
played once the mode becomes available. To switch back
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, tap the lever
to ACC, press and hold the “ON/OFF/MODE” button
down and release (“SET/DECEL”). The EVIC will dis-
again for at least one second.
play the set speed.
NOTE: You must observe the display when setting or
changing speed, not the speedometer.
To Vary the Speed Setting • The Electronic Stability Program/Traction Control

There are two ways to change the set speed: System (ESP/TCS) activates.
• Use the accelerator pedal to adjust the vehicle to the To Resume
desired speed and push the lever down (“SET/ Push the lever up and release (“RESUME/ACCEL”) and
DECEL”). then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The
EVIC will display the last set speed.
3
• Tap the stalk up (“ACCEL”) or down (“DECEL”) to
increase or decrease the set speed in 1 mph (1 km/h) To Turn Off
increments respectively. Hold for 5 mph (10 km/h) The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
increments. memory if:
To Cancel • You push and release the “ON/OFF/MODE” button.
The system will disable Normal cruise control without
• You turn off the ignition.
erasing the memory if:
• You switch off ESP.
• You softly tap or depress the brake pedal.
If the cruise control system is turned off and reactivated,
• You pull the speed control lever toward you (“CAN-
the system will return to the Vehicle-to-vehicle (adaptive)
CEL”).
distance control mode.
REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM The system uses four sensors located in the rear bumper
The Rear Park Assist system is a driver aid that senses for to scan for obstacles up to 79 in (200 cm) away from the
obstacles behind the vehicle. Refer to the Warnings, rear bumper fascia. The warning display located above
Cautions, and Notes in this section for system limitations the rear window provides both visible and audible
and usage recommendations. warnings to indicate the range of the object.
The Rear Park Assist system is active when the driver
shifts the transmission into the REVERSE position, and
the parking brake is not applied, and the vehicle speed is
less than 10 mph (16 km/h).
The system can be turned on or off through the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) when the vehicle is in
PARK. Refer to “Personal Settings (Customer-
Rear Park Assist LED Display

The warning display contains two sets of yellow and red The system dimly illuminates the two inner most yellow
indicators, one set to warn of obstacles behind the left indicators when it is ON and detecting no obstacles. The
rear of the vehicle and the other set to warn of obstacles following chart shows the warning display operation
behind the right rear of the vehicle. The driver can view when the system is detecting an obstacle:
the indicators either through the rearview mirror or by
looking at the display above the rear window. 3
WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES
DISPLAY INDICA- OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM: INDICATOR AUDIBLE SIGNAL
TOR REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER COLOR
Inner LED 79 in (200 cm) Yellow Yes, Half Second
1st LED 51.2 in (130 cm) Yellow No
2nd LED 45.3 in (115 cm) Yellow No
3rd LED 31.5 in (80 cm) 39.3 in (100 cm) Yellow No
4th LED 25.5 in (65 cm) 33.5 in (85 cm) Yellow No
5th LED 20 in (50 cm) 27.6 in (70 cm) Yellow No
6th LED 16 in (40 cm) 19.7 in (50 cm) Red Yes, Intermittent
7th LED 6 in (15 cm) 11.8 in (30 cm) Red Yes, Continuous
NOTE: The Rear Park Assist system will MUTE the

radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
• Before using the Rear Park Assist system, it is
WARNING! strongly recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the ve-
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even hicle when the vehicle is not used for towing.
when using the Rear Park Assist system. Always Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to
check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots be- when the warning display turns the red indicators
fore backing up. You are responsible for safety and ON. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount
must continue to pay attention to your surround- and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
ings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is
death. behind the vehicle.
(Continued)
NOTE:
CAUTION!
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris
• The Rear Park Assist system is only a parking aid to keep the system operating properly.
and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, in-
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
cluding small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
affect the performance of the system.
temporarily detected or not detected at all. Ob- 3
stacles located above or below the sensors will not If “Service Park Assist System” appears in the EVIC after
be detected when they are in close proximity. making sure the rear bumper is clean please see your
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the authorized dealer.
Rear Park Assist system to be able to stop in time
when the obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver look over their shoulder when
using the Rear Park Assist system.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE Courtesy/Reading Lights

The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights,
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy/
an optional universal garage door opener (HomeLink威),
reading lights.
storage for sunglasses, and an optional power sunroof
switch. Press the lens to turn on the light. Press it a second time
to turn off the light.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is
turned fully upward, past the second detent.
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the console, a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a ⬙push/push⬙ design.
Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open.
Push on the raised bar to close.
Overhead Console
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED

HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery. 3
The HomeLink威 buttons are located in the overhead
console, and contain one, two, or three dots/lines desig-
nating the different HomeLink威 channels.
HomeLink威 Buttons
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
Programming HomeLink姞
WARNING!
Before You Begin
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
while you are training the Universal Transceiver.
erase all channels before you begin training.
Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in
the path of the door or gate. Only use this trans- To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up
ceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop to 20 seconds. The EVIC will display “CLEARING
and reverse” feature as required by federal safety CHANNELS.” Release the buttons when the EVIC mes-
standards. This includes most garage door opener sage states “CHANNELS CLEARED.”
models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
garage door opener without these safety features.
hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed
Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
to HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or as-
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
sistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan- Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training.
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
cause serious injury or death.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
from the HomeLink威 buttons while keeping the EVIC may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted
display in view. in the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
For optimal training, point the battery end of the hand- 4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button. If
held transmitter away from the HomeLink威. the channel has been trained, the EVIC display will now
state “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.”
3
3. Simultaneously, press and hold both the chosen
HomeLink威 button and the hand-held transmitter button If the EVIC display still states “CHANNEL # TRAIN-
until the EVIC display changes from “CHANNEL # ING” repeat Step 3.
TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
NOTE: After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the
Then release both the HomeLink威 and hand-held trans- garage door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the
mitter buttons. garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have rolling code. If so, proceed
If the EVIC display states “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat
to the heading “Programming A Rolling Code System.”
Step 3. If the signal is too weak, replace the battery in the
original hand-held transmitter. 5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
It may take up to 30 seconds, or longer, in rare cases. The
the “learn” or “training” button.
garage door may open and close while you train.
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna 6. Firmly press and release the “learn” or “training”
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is button. The name and color of the button may vary by
NOT the button normally used to open and close the manufacturer.
door).
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the “Learn” button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig- EVIC display will change from “CHANNEL # TRAIN-
nals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of ING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
transmission – which may not be long enough for
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
HomeLink威 to pick up the signal during programming.
at this time.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are 3
designed to “time-out” in the same manner. Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink威” earlier in this section.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage Using HomeLink姞
door or gate motor. To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
HomeLink” Step 3 with the following:
etc.) The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button used at any time.
while you press and release - every two seconds
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until HomeLink威
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
follow these steps:
Troubleshooting Tips
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button for
20 seconds until the EVIC display states “CHANNEL # • Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
TRAINING.” Do not release the button.
• Press the learn button on the garage door opener to
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program- complete the training for rolling code.
ming HomeLink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
Security to plug it back in?
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
If you are having any problems or require assistance,
in your vehicle.
please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
20 seconds until the EVIC message states “CHANNELS
CLEARED.” Note that all channels will be erased. Indi-
vidual channels cannot be erased.
General Information POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following visors on the overhead console.
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference
3
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term “IC:” before the certification/registration num- Power Sunroof Controls
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi-
cations were met.
Opening Sunroof - Express

WARNING!
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat- will open fully and then stop automatically. This is called
tended children, can become entrapped by the Express Open. During Express Open operation, any
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
Closing Sunroof - Express
injury or death.
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
• In an accident, there is a greater risk of being will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always Express Close. During Express Close operation, any
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sun- Pinch Protect Feature
roof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
any object, to project through the sunroof opening. the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
Injury may result. struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc- Sunshade Operation

tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
release to Express Close. sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
Pinch Protect Override NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing, open.
press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after
3
Wind Buffeting
the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
toward the closed position.
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
pressed. windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
Venting Sunroof - Express
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
Press and release the ⬙V⬙ button in the center of the
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
switch, and the sunroof will open to the vent position.
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
This is called Express Vent, which operates regardless of
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
window.
Sunroof Maintenance Sunroof Fully Closed

Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
the glass panel. sunroof is fully closed.
Ignition Off Operation ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle There are two 12-Volt electrical outlets on this vehicle.
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse.
will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch
is turned OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this The 12-Volt power outlet next to the ash receiver tray (if
feature. equipped with an optional Smoker’s Package) has power
available only when the ignition is ON. This outlet will
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power sunroof also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit.
switch will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either front door WARNING!
will cancel this feature. The time is programmable. Refer
to “Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit,” under Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on
“Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” the center console on vehicles not equipped with the
under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury could
Section 4. result.
NOTE: If desired, the power outlet next to the ash The center console outlet is powered directly from the
receiver tray (if equipped) can be converted by your battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into
authorized dealer to provide power with the ignition this outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent
switch in the LOCK position. engine starting.
Front Power Outlet Center Console Power Outlet

Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off

CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION! • After the use of high power draw accessories or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
power from the vehicle’s battery even when not in driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
and/or prevent engine starting. sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, power outlet can cause damage.
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
(Continued)
CUPHOLDERS Rear Seat Cupholders

The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
Front Seat Cupholders
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide
center console.
convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while
maintaining a resting place for the rear occupants elbows. 3
Front Seat Cupholders
Rear Seat Cupholders

STORAGE
Console Features
The center console contains two shift bezel cubby bins
with rubber mats for holding small items. For vehicles
not equipped with navigation radio, the console also
contains an extra storage bin located below the climate
control, which holds up to four CD jewel cases.
Without Vehicle Entertainment System (VES)威
Two separate storage compartments are also located
underneath the armrest.
1 — Release button for bottom compartment

2 — Release button for top compartment
3 — Top Compartment
4 — Bottom Compartment. (You can access this compartment
directly, without first exposing the upper compartment, by oper-
ating the Release Button for the bottom compartment with the
armrest down.)
The top compartment holds small items, such as a pen front-opening lid allows for easy access to the storage
and note pad, while the larger bottom compartment will compartment for both the driver and the front passenger.
hold CDs and alike. The bottom compartment also con-
Cargo Area
tains a 12-Volt power outlet and a molded-in coin holder
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
(designed to hold various size coins). A slot in the left and
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling
right side of the top compartment provides clearance for
nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When
3
power cords to pass conveniently out of the bin with the
the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,
lid closed. This feature is ideal for games, laptop’s, cell
nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
phones or other electrical equipment. The console’s front
opening lid allows for easy access to these compartments.
WARNING!
With Vehicle Entertainment System (VES)威
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
The center console contains a large storage compartment.
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle han-
The storage compartment contains a 12-Volt power outlet
dling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
and a molded-in coin holder (designed to hold various
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
size coins). A slot in the top left and right side of the
storage compartment provides clearance for power cords • Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
to pass conveniently out of the compartment with the lid heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
closed. This feature is ideal for games, laptop’s, cell (Continued)
phones, or other electrical equipment. The console’s
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING!

• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear • Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed position. If the seatback in not securely locked
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the into position, the seat will not provide the proper
rear of the vehicle to sway. stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
the seatback. This could impair visibility or be- • The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
collision. position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make be seriously injured in an accident. Children
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the should be seated and using the proper restraint
seatback above the seat strap. system.
(Continued)
REAR WINDOW FEATURES

• To help protect against personal injury, passengers Electric Rear Window Defroster
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The The Electric Rear Window Defroster button is
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying located on the climate control. Press this button to
turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
rearview mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button
3
in seats and use seat belts.
will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap-
CARGO AREA FEATURES
proximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
Trunk Mat — If Equipped operation, press the button a second time.
A reversible trunk mat covers the bottom of the cargo
area. The rubber side of the mat is used to protect the
interior of the trunk from mud, snow, and debris. It
provides a nonskid surface to keep cargo from sliding.
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

CAUTION!
The automatic load leveling system will provide a level-
• To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
rear window defroster, do not use scrapers, sharp conditions.
instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
interior surface of the window.
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
• Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
water. to complete depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately
15 hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 ▫ Automatic All Wheel Drive (AWD) Displays
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 4
䡵 Instrument Cluster — Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
▫ Keyless Go Display — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 232
䡵 Instrument Cluster — Premium . . . . . . . . . . . 209
▫ Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 210
▫ Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS)
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
– If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
▫ Navigation — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 ▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
▫ Oil Change Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
䡵 Setting The Analog Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Sales Code REQ — AM/FM Stereo Radio And ▫ Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
6–Disc CD/DVD Changer (MP3/WMA AUX Communication (UConnect威)
Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . 243 ▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD 䡵 Sales Code RES — AM/FM Stereo Radio With
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . 251 CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files . . . . . . . 253 ▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 261
▫ List Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA ▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
▫ Info Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA ▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 269
䡵 AM/FM/CD/DVD Multimedia System Radio
䡵 Sales Code RES/RSC — AM/FM Stereo Radio
(RER/REN) – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) And Sirius
▫ Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
System (VR) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 270
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD ▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Identification Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . 287
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 280 ▫ Selecting Satellite Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 281 ▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
䡵 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 4
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Mode . . . . 289
▫ Connecting The iPod威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
▫ Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone
▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Using Radio Buttons . . 283 ▫ Operating Instructions — Video
Entertainment System (VES)™
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
䡵 Kicker威 High Performance Sound System With
䡵 Satellite Radio — If Equipped Driver-Selectable Surround (DSS)
(REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU Radios Only). . . . . 287 – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
䡵 Sirius Backseat TV™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 293 䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

䡵 Video Entertainment System (VES)™ ▫ Manual Air Conditioning And Heating
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls ▫ Automatic Temperature Control
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
䡵 CD/DVD Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 ▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . 297
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 - Air Outlet 7 - Radio 13 - Ignition Switch

2 - Instrument Cluster 8 - Climate Control 14 - Hood Release
3 - Hazard Switch 9 - Heated Seat Switch* 15 - Trunk Release Switch
4 - Analog Clock 10 - Power Outlet 16 - Headlight Switch
5 - Electronic Stability Program OFF But- 11 - Ash Tray* * If Equipped
ton* / Traction Control System OFF Button*
6 - Glove Compartment 12 - Storage Compartment*
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS NOTE:

• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
1. Electronic Speed Control / Adaptive Cruise Control
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
(ACC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the electronic • Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
speed control or Adaptive Cruise Control indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
(ACC) is ON. 5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Low Fuel Indicator Light
This light will turn on and a single chime will 6. Odometer/Trip Odometer Display / Electronic Vehicle
sound when the fuel level drops to 1/8 tank. Information Center (EVIC) Display — If Equipped
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been
3. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped driven. The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage.
This light will turn on when the front fog lights are Refer to “Trip Odometer Button” for additional information.
ON.
NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require upon transfer of
4. Turn Signal Indicators vehicle ownership, the seller certify the mileage the
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal vehicle has been driven. Therefore, if the odometer
when the turn signal lever is operated. reading is changed because of repair or replacement, be
sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the
service so that the correct mileage can be determined.
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) / All Wheel Drive (AWD) 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate
Displays (Base Cluster) the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
On vehicles equipped with a Base Instrument Cluster, the change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
odometer will display “2drivE” when the vehicle is in means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD), and “4drivE” when All Wheel dependent upon your personal driving style.
Drive (AWD) is activated.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
If the odometer displays the “tCASE” warning message time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. To 4
after engine start up, or during driving, the AWD system turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
is not functioning properly and service is required. TRIP ODOMETER button on the instrument cluster. To
reset the oil change indicator system (after performing
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with Electronic Vehicle Infor-
the scheduled maintenance) perform the following pro-
mation Center (EVIC) will display SERVICE AWD SYS-
cedure:
TEM if the system is not functioning properly and service
is required. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (Do not
Center (EVIC)” in this section for more information. start the engine).
Change Oil Message (Base Cluster) 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change times within 10 seconds.
indicator system. The “Change Oil” message will flash in
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
On vehicles equipped with a Premium Instrument Clus- in this section for more information.
ter, this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information
7. Tachometer
Center (EVIC) messages when the appropriate conditions
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible
exist.
engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear
Lo tirE range. Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red
When the appropriate condition exists the odometer area.
display will toggle between Lo and tirE for three cycles.
8. Engine Temperature Warning Light
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message This light will turn on and a single chime will
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel sound to warn of an overheated engine condition.
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a When this light turns on, the engine temperature
“Check Gascap” message will display in the EVIC. is critically hot. If the light turns on while driving, safely
Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP pull over and stop the vehicle. The vehicle should be
ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the turned OFF immediately and serviced as soon as pos-
problem continues, the message will appear the next time sible. (Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in Section 6
the vehicle is started. for more information).
9. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light — If Equipped 10. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) / Brake Assist
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System System (BAS) Malfunction Indicator Light
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition The yellow Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for / Brake Assist System (BAS) Malfunction Indi-
as long as four seconds. cator Light will turn on when the key in the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
If the ABS Light remains on or turns on while driving,
The light should go out with the engine running. The
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not 4
system will turn this light on continuously while the
functioning and service is required. However, the con-
engine is running if it detects a malfunction in either the
ventional brake system will continue to operate normally
ESP, the BAS or both.
if the Brake Warning Light is not on.
11. Airbag Warning Light
If the ABS Light is on, the brake system should be
This light will turn on for six to eight seconds
serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS Light does not turn on when
turned ON. If the light is either not on during
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
starting, or stays on, or turns on while driving,
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
then have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
12. Brake Warning Light The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
This light monitors various brake functions, ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
including brake fluid level and parking brake system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
application. If the brake light turns on, it may indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with dropped below a specified level.
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi-
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
hydraulic system malfunction or a problem with the
the brake fluid level checked.
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) sys- If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
tem. In this case, the light will remain on until the sary.
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to
the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during
each stop.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is

WARNING!
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately. 13. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) / Traction
Control System (TCS) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System If this indicator light flashes during accelera- 4
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force tion, ease up on the accelerator and apply as
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the little throttle as possible. Adapt your speed and
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS driving to the prevailing road conditions, and
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP).
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by 14. Temperature Gauge
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ON position. The light should illuminate for approxi- ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
by an authorized dealer.
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to

WARNING!
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
CAUTION! others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
hood yourself, refer to Section 7 and follow the
“H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
paragraph.
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H,” and you hear continuous chimes,
15. Trip Odometer Button
turn the engine OFF immediately and call for service.
Trip Odometer Button — Base Cluster
The word ⬙TRIP⬙ will appear when this button is pressed.
Push in and hold the button for two seconds when the
trip odometer displays to reset it to 0 miles (km). A
second press of the button will display the outside
temperature in the odometer.
Trip Odometer Button — Premium Cluster 18. Seat Belt Reminder Light
Press this button to change the display from odometer to This light will turn on for five to eight seconds as
either of two trip odometer settings. The letter “A” or “B” a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and turned ON. A chime will sound if the driver’s seat
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer belt is unbuckled during the bulb check. The seat belt
to 0 miles (km). The odometer must be in TRIP mode to warning light will flash or remain on continuously if the
reset it. driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled after the bulb check
or when driving. 4
16. High Beam Light
This light will turn on when the high beam 19. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
headlights are ON. Push the multifunction lever The vehicle security light flashes rapidly when the ve-
away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to hicle security alarm is arming, and slowly when the
high beam. vehicle security alarm is armed.
17. Shift Lever Indicator 20. Fuel Gauge
This indicator shows the automatic transmission shift The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
lever selection. the ignition switch is in the ON position.
21. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light Also, have the system checked by an authorized dealer if
This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check the light does not come on during starting.
when the ignition switch is turned ON. This
22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
light will also turn on while the engine is
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
running if there is a problem with the Elec-
should be checked monthly when cold and
tronic Throttle Control (ETC) system.
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
If the light comes on while the engine is running, safely by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible, placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
place the shift lever in PARK, and cycle the ignition key. has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
The light should turn off. If the light remains lit with the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable. determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as tires.)
possible.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
If the light is flashing when the engine is running, equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
immediate service is required. In this case, you may (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to 4
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace-
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
continue to function properly.
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If

CAUTION!
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
The TPMS has been optimized for the original vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
warning have been established for the tire size rized dealer.
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
24. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD. The
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
OBD system monitors engine and automatic
sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants
transmission control systems. The MIL will turn on when
or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
the key is in the ON position before engine start. If the
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
MIL does not come on when turning the key from LOCK
to ON, have the condition checked promptly.
23. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg- Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
ing system. The light should come on when the poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will (EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
not require towing.
The MIL flashes to alert you to serious conditions that
could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs. 4
25. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, and shut OFF the engine as soon as possible. A
single chime will sound when this light turns on.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
The engine oil level must be checked using the procedure tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
shown in Section 7. instrument cluster.
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a • Navigation system screens (if equipped)
variety of useful information by pressing the switches
• Audio mode display
mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the
following: • Surround Sound Modes (If Equipped with Driver-
Selectable Surround [DSS])
• System status
The system allows the driver to select information by
• Vehicle information warning message displays
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
• Tire Pressure Monitor System (if equipped) wheel.
• Personal settings (customer programmable features) Press and release the MENU button and the
mode displayed will change between Trip
• Compass display
Functions, Navigation (if equipped), System
• Outside temperature display MENU Status, and Personal Settings.
Button
• Trip computer functions
• UConnect威 hands-free communication system dis-
plays (if equipped)
Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the
a selection. The FUNCTION SELECT button Compass/Temp/Audio screen. Along with
also functions as a remote sound system con- compass reading and outside temperature, this
FUNC- trol. Refer to “Remote Sound System Controls” AUDIO screen will display radio and media mode
TION in this section. MODE information depending on which radio is in the
SELECT Button vehicle. Refer to “Remote Sound System Con-
Button trols” in this section.
4
Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Functions, Navigation (if equipped), System Displays
Status Messages, and Personal Settings (Cus- When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
SCROLL tomer Programmable Features). The SCROLL the following messages:
Button button also functions as a remote sound system • Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if
control. Refer to “Remote Sound System Con-
the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile [1.6 km] with
trols” in this section.
either turn signal on)
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single • Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
chime) motion)
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime) • Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
• Key FOB Battery Low (with a single chime) • Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
• Memory #1/#2 Profile Set • ECO – Multi-Displacement System (MDS) is activated
(If Equipped with MDS)
• Memory #1/#2 Profile Recall
• SERVICE AWD SYSTEM — All Wheel Drive (AWD)
• Memory System Disabled – Vehicle Not In PARK (with
system is not functioning properly and service is
a single chime)
required.
• Memory System Disabled – Seat Belt Buckled (with a
• Normal Cruise Ready — When Adaptive Cruise Con-
single chime)
trol (ACC) system is turned off and Normal (Fixed
• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in PARK Speed) Cruise Control mode is available. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in Section 3 (if
• Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
equipped).
chime if speed is above 1 mph [1.6 km/h])
• Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph [1.6 km/h])
• Cruise Off — When the Adaptive Cruise Control • Driver Override — If you apply the accelerator after
(ACC) system is turned off. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise setting the desired speed in the ACC system. Refer to
Control (ACC)” in Section 3 (if equipped). “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in Section 3 (if
equipped).
• ACC Ready — When the ACC system is activated.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in Section 3 • Distance Set — After changing the desired following
(if equipped). distance in the ACC system, this message will display
momentarily. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control 4
• ACC Set — After setting the desired speed in the ACC
(ACC)” in Section 3 (if equipped).
system. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
Section 3 (if equipped). • Attention — If the ACC system predicts that its
maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain
• ACC Cancelled — To disable the ACC system. Refer to
the set distance, this message will flash and a chime
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in Section 3 (if
will sound while ACC continues to apply its maxi-
equipped).
mum braking capacity. When this occurs, you should
• Sensed Vehicle Indicator — The system detects a immediately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a
slower moving vehicle in the same lane. Refer to safe distance from the vehicle ahead. Refer to “Adap-
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in Section 3 (if tive Cruise Control (ACC)” in Section 3 (if equipped).
equipped).
• ACC Blinded — If the ACC system deactivates due to • Channel # Transmit

performance limiting conditions. Refer to “Adaptive
• Channel # Training
Cruise Control (ACC)” in Section 3 (if equipped).
• Channel # Trained
• ACC Unavailable — If the ACC system turns off due
to a temporary malfunction that limits functionality. • Clearing Channels
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in Section 3
• Channels Cleared
(if equipped).
• Did Not Train
• Service ACC — If the ACC system turns off due to an
internal system fault that requires service from an • Left Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
authorized dealer. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure
(ACC)” in Section 3 (if equipped). Monitor” under “Starting And Operating.”
• Adjustable Pedals Disabled – Cruise Engaged (with a • Left Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
single chime) — only available on vehicles equipped information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure
with memory seats. Monitor” under “Starting And Operating.”
• Adjustable Pedals Disabled – Vehicle In REVERSE • Right Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer
(with a single chime) — only available on vehicles to information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure
equipped with memory seats. Monitor” under “Starting And Operating.”
• Right Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer Oil Change Required
to information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
Monitor” under “Starting And Operating.” indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec-
• Check TPM System (with a single chime). Refer to
onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
information on “Tire Pressure Monitor” under “Start-
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
ing And Operating.”
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
• Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in Section 5) engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon 4
your personal driving style.
• Service Park Assist System (with a single chime)
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
• Service Keyless System
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. To
• Wrong Key turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system
• Push Button or Insert Key/Turn To Run (refer to
(after performing the scheduled maintenance) perform
“Remote Starting System” in Section 2)
the following procedure:
• Oil Change Required (with a single chime)
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip
within 10 seconds. Computer functions.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-
tion.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not • Average Fuel Economy / Fuel Saver Mode
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
Trip Functions
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
• Average Fuel Economy / Fuel Saver Mode reset.
• Distance To Empty Vehicles with the 5.7L Multi-Displacement System (MDS)
may be equipped with the FUEL SAVER MODE in the
• Trip A
Trip Functions of the EVIC. The FUEL SAVER MODE
• Trip B message will display above the average fuel economy in
the EVIC display. This message will appear whenever
• Elapsed Time
• Display Units of Measure in
MDS allows the engine to operate on four cylinders, This feature allows you to monitor when the MDS
which will vary depending on driving habits and vehicle switches off the fuel on four of the eight cylinders and it
usage. can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase
the time in which the fuel saver mode is active.
4 Cylinder Operation - MDS On

8 Cylinder Operation - MDS Off
• Distance To Empty (DTE) • Trip A

Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is reset.
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
• Trip B
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION
reset.
SELECT button.
• Elapsed Time
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) or START position.
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
• Display Units of Measure in
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display will
To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
TION SELECT button until “US” or “METRIC” appears.
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will display.
To Reset The Display

Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button once to clear the resettable function being dis-
played. To reset all resettable functions, press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within
three seconds of resetting the currently-displayed func-
tion. (Reset ALL will display during this three-second 4
window).
Automatic All Wheel Drive (AWD) Displays — If
Equipped
Automatic AWD operation could be activated by outside Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) to All Wheel Drive (AWD)
temperature, wheel slip, or other predetermined condi-
tions, when the vehicle automatically transitions from
RWD to AWD the EVIC will display the following
message for five seconds.
When the vehicle automatically transitions from AWD to Keyless Go Display — If Equipped
RWD the EVIC will display the following message for When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed to
five seconds. change ignition states, the Keyless Go icon momentarily
appears in the EVIC display showing the new ignition
state.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) to Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)

Refer to “All Wheel Drive — If Equipped” in Section 5 for
more information on the All Wheel Drive (AWD) system. Keyless Go Display
The round symbol in the middle rotates to point at the new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
new ignition state. If desired, the ignition state graphic display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may
can be set to be constantly visible by pressing the EVIC also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360
MENU button until the display appears. degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic
objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the EVIC
NOTE: Under certain conditions, the display may be
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
superseded by another display of higher priority. But
when the ignition state is changed, the display always Manual Compass Calibration 4
re-appears. If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” message
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
Compass Display
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
The compass readings indicate the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the 1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
COMPASS button to display one of eight com-
2. Press and hold the COMPASS button for approxi-
COM- pass readings and the outside temperature. mately two seconds.
PASS
Button 3. Press the SCROLL button until “Calibrate Compass”
displays in the EVIC.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is
4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to module is located, and it can cause interference with the
start the calibration. The message “CAL” will display in compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
the EVIC.
5. Complete one or more 360 degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
message turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences and provide the most accurate compass head- 1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
ing.
2. Press and hold the COMPASS button for approxi-
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of mately two seconds.
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Cell Phones, Lap-
tops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Compass Variance” Navigation — If Equipped

message and the last variance zone number displays in
Navigation Display Control
the EVIC.
Press and release the MENU button until Navigation
4. Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until displays in the EVIC. When the Navigation System is On,
the proper variance zone is selected according to the the steering wheel buttons can be used to select the Map
map. or Menu display on the Navigation Unit. When the Menu
display is active, the SCROLL button can be used to scroll 4
5. Press and release the COMPASS button to exit.
through the list, the FUNCTION SELECT button can be
Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) – If used to select an item, and the AUDIO MODE button can
Equipped be used to return to the previous menu. When the Map
Press and release the MENU button until “Surround display is active, pressing the FUNCTION SELECT but-
Sound” displays in the EVIC. The EVIC provides infor- ton will change the Navigation Unit Display to the Menu.
mation on the current surround mode.
Turn-by-Turn Directions
• Stereo The EVIC displays turn-by-turn directions to a pro-
grammed destination when Turn-by-Turn Navigation is
• Audio Surround
enabled through Personal Settings. When enabled, the
While in the Surround Sound menu, press the FUNC- EVIC displays the name of the approaching road at the
TION SELECT button to change surround modes.
top of the screen, followed by an arrow to indicate the the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to
direction to turn the vehicle, and a count down to select English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, or Francais.
indicate the distance to the turn. Then, as you continue, the information will display in the
selected language.
NOTE: Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for
detailed operating instructions. NOTE: The EVIC will not change the UConnect威 lan-
guage selection. Refer to “Language Selection” under
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
“Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
Features)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall “Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)”
features when the transmission is in PARK. When ON is selected, all doors will lock automatically
when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set-
To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
tings displays in the EVIC.
TION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following
“Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit”
choices.
When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the
“Language” vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or
When in this display you may select one of five lan- NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Remote Key Unlock” touch a passenger handle to unlock all doors passively
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s when Driver’s Door Only is programmed in the EVIC.
door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
“Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock” — If
Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver
Equipped
Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE
When ON is selected, you can use your RKE transmitter
transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen-
to recall one of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
ger’s doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of
Each memory profile contains desired position settings 4
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
for the driver seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals (if
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
equipped), power tilt and telescopic steering column (if
press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until
equipped), and a set of desired radio station presets.
“Driver Door 1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.
When OFF is selected, only the MEMORY switch on the
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry driver’s door trim panel will recall memory profiles. To
and the EVIC is programmed to Unlock All Doors 1st make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
Press, all doors will unlock no matter which handle is SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. Refer to
grasped. If Driver Door 1st Press is programmed, only “Driver Memory Seat” in Section 3.
the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is
grasped. With Passive Entry, if Driver Door 1st Press is
programmed touching the handle more than once will
only result in the driver’s door opening. You have to
“Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock” vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” ap-
the RKE LOCK button is pressed. This feature may be pears.
selected with or without the flash lights on lock/unlock
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
feature. To make your selection, press and release the
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF”
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the
appears.
door. Refer to “Easy Entry/Exit Seat” under “Driver
“Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers” — If Equipped Memory Seat” in Section 3.
When ON is selected, the system will automatically
“Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock”
activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
the windshield. To make your selection, press and release
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF”
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
appears. When OFF is selected, the system reverts to the
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
standard intermittent wiper operation.
your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SE-
“Automatically Move Seat Back on Exit” — If LECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
“Headlights On with Wipers” (Available with Auto “Tilt Mirrors Down in Reverse” — If Equipped
Headlights Only) When ON is selected, the outside rearview mirrors will
When ON is selected, and the HEADLIGHT switch is in tilt downward when the ignition switch is in the ON
the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi- position and the transmission is in the REVERSE posi-
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The tion. The mirrors will move back to their previous
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned position when the transmission is shifted out of RE-
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your VERSE. To make your selection, press and release the
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” 4
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. appears.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime “Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock”
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
brightness, refer to “Lights” in Section 3. and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec-
“Delay Turning Headlights Off”
tion, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
until “OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “0,”
“30,” “60,” or “90” appears.
“Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit” make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
When this feature is selected, the power WINDOW SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
switches, radio, hands-free system (if equipped), DVD
“Confirmation of Voice Commands” — If
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
Equipped
and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes
When ON is selected, all voice commands from the
after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening a vehicle
UConnect威 system are confirmed. To make your selec-
door will cancel this feature. To make your selection,
press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until
until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” “10 min.,” “30 min.,” or “60
min.” appears. “Park Assist System” — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the system will scan for objects
“AWD System Displays”
behind the vehicle when the transmission is in the
When in this display you may select “ON” or “OFF”.
REVERSE or NEUTRAL position. To make your selec-
When ON is selected, the EVIC displays the current
mode of the transfer-case. A five second display appears
until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
any time the transfer-case changes from All Wheel Drive
(AWD) to Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) or from RWD to
AWD. The EVIC also displays the current mode of the
transfer-case when you shift into drive or reverse. To
“Turn-by-Turn Navigation” — If Equipped this message can be turned on or off. To make your
When ON is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a desig- button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
nated turn within a programmed route. To make your
“Display Units of Measure in”
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
“Passive Entry” units of measure. To make your selection, press and 4
When ON is selected, the Passive Entry System allows release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “US” or
you to unlock the vehicle’s door(s) and trunk without “METRIC” appears.
using the RKE transmitter unlock button, or the unlock
“Automatic High Beams” — If Equipped
button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel. To
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
“Display ECO” SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. Refer to
Vehicles with the 5.7L Multi-Displacement System (MDS) “SmartBeams” in Section 3.
are equipped with a “ECO” display message. The “ECO”
message is located in the Compass/Temperature display,
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK SALES CODE REQ — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX
panel, press and hold the button until the setting is JACK)
correct.
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Analog Clock
REQ Radio
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
position to operate the radio.
stations without stopping until you release it.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
SCAN Button
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
the next listenable station, in AM, FM or Satellite (if 4
time to turn off the radio.
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
Electronic Volume Control listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
Voice Recognition Button (UConnect威 Hands-Free
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
Phone) — If Equipped
volume and to the left decreases it.
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be (UConnect威) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
set at the same volume level as last played. Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
SEEK Buttons If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button (UConnect威 Hands-Free Phone) — If 3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
Equipped SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone will begin to blink.
(UConnect威) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not knob to save the time change.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
TIME Button
and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
Press the TIME button and the time of day will display. In
this display follow the above procedure, starting at
AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switch
step 2.
between the time and frequency displays.
INFO Button
Clock Setting Procedure
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
RW/FF Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM treble tones.
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
TUNE Control time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the 4
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones. the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
MUSIC TYPE Button 16-Digit Character

Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type Program Type
Display
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button Foreign Language Language
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
Information Inform
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
Jazz Jazz
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information. News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
Oldies Oldies
format types:
Personality Persnlty
16-Digit Character Public Public
Program Type
Display
Rhythm and Blues R&B
No program type or un-
None Religious Music Rel Musc
defined
Adult Hits Adlt Hit Religious Talk Rel Talk
Classical Classicl Rock Rock
Classic Rock Cls Rock Soft Soft
College College Soft Rock Soft Rck
Country Country Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R & B
16-Digit Character NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll

Program Type through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
Display
Sports Sports select an entry and make changes.
Talk Talk • DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
Top 40 Top 40 selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
Weather Weather highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (if equipped). 4
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency • DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between
station with the same selected Music Type name. The playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by
Music Type function only operates when in the FM pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).
mode.
• DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type will display the following:
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station. • Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
SETUP Button available on the disc (if equipped).
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
• Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will • VES™ CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the
switch to different audio languages (if supported on mode of either the IR1 or IR2, wireless headphones by
the disc) (if equipped). pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
• Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change • Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
equipped). knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
NOTE:
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
• The available selections for each of the above entries
changes.
varies depending upon the disc.
• Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
• These selections can only be made while playing a
user to scroll through the following items, and set
DVD.
defaults according to customer preference.
• VES™ Power - Allows you to turn VES™ ON and
Menu Language — If Equipped
OFF (if equipped).
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
• VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls (if default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
equipped). language supported by disc). If you want to select a
language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙
Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/ Subtitles — If Equipped
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle
number and then push to select. Off or On.
Audio Language — If Equipped Audio DRC — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
language (effective only if the language is supported by dynamic range. The default is set to ⬙High,⬙ and under
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the 4
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using setting is ⬙Normal.⬙
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
to select the number and then push to select.
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide
Subtitle Language — If Equipped screen, pan scan, and letter box.
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
AutoPlay — If Equipped
language (effective only if the language is supported by
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
to select the number and then push to select.
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
customer-preferred settings. pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
AM and FM Buttons
twice.
Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
button number will display.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. Buttons 1 - 6
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
and press and release that button. If a button is not Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
DISC Button
ton, the station will continue to play but will not be
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
stored into pushbutton memory.
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO) position to operate the radio.
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
geographic region. These region codes must match in
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays 4
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the CD into the player.
of the player a maximum of five times.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
CAUTION! is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate CAUTION!
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
components. player mechanism.
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s) SCAN Button (CD MODE)

Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the CD currently playing.
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
TIME Button (CD MODE)
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF. another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button
works in a similar manner.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning Switches the Radio into the AM or FM Radio mode.
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
CD, MP3/MWA modes.
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
• Maximum number of directory levels: 8
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the • Maximum number of files: 255
following restrictions.
• Maximum number of folders: 100
Supported Media (Disc Types)
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the 4
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video, • Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3. character extension)
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems) • Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 character extension)
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and MPEG Specifi- Sampling Fre-
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/ Bit Rate (kbps)
cation quency (kHz)
WMA tracks on that disc. 320, 256, 224,
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats MPEG-1 Audio 192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause play- 160, 128, 144,
MPEG-2 Audio
back problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file 24, 22.05, 16 112, 96, 80, 64,
Layer 3
56, 48
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio WMA Specifica- Sampling Fre-
Bit Rate (kbps)
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling tion quency (kHz)
frequencies in the following table are supported. In 48, 64, 96, 128,
WMA 44.1 and 48
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The 160, 192 VBR
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates. are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3/WMA Files LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded, Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files. folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
affected by the following: 4
playable files).
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
CD-R media
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
to load than non-multisession discs
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will Name, and Folder Name (if available).
increase with more files and folders
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time⬙ priority mode.
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
more and radio will display song titles for each file.
before writing to the disc.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display. No function.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which No function.
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers. TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the TIME button to change the display from
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
display for five seconds.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
No function.
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
down. No function.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition Dolby威

System (VR) (If Equipped) Manufactured under license from Dolby威 Laboratories.
For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in ⬙Dolby威⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Section 3. Dolby威 Laboratories.
For UConnect威 “Voice Recognition System (VR),” refer to Macrovision
“Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3. This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec- 4
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
(UConnect威) (If Equipped)
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
Section 3.
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If engineering or disassembly is prohibited
Equipped)
DTS™
Refer to “Satellite Radio” in this section.
⬙DTS™⬙ and ⬙DTS™ 2.0⬙ are trademarks of Digital The-
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment ater Systems, Inc.
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)™
Guide.”
AM/FM/CD/DVD MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM RADIO Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition

(RER/REN) – IF EQUIPPED System (VR) — If Equipped
For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
Section 3.
of the unit’s faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
The REN and RER Multimedia systems contain a radio,
Communication (UConnect姞) — If Equipped
CD/DVD player, USB port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive
(HDD). Sirius Satellite Radio is optional. The 6.5 in
Section 3.
(16.5 cm) touch screen allows for easy menu selection.
The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System
(GPS)-based Navigation system. Global Positioning System (GPS) — RER only
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
Refer to your Multimedia system (REN) or Navigation
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The
(RER) user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the
worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s
clock very accurate, once the appropriate time zone and
daylight savings information is set.
To Manually Set the Clock — RER/REN 6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed. The daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen. current setting:
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the 1. Turn on the multimedia system. 4
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-
ward is displayed. 3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
played to change the current setting.
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
Show Time if Radio is Off Changing the Time Zone

When selected, this feature will display the time of day
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
on the touch screen when the multimedia system is
turned off. Proceed as follows to change the current 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
setting: clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
1. Turn on the multimedia system. 3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
the screen.
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
SALES CODE RES — AM/FM STEREO RADIO Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right position to operate the radio.
Push the On/Volume control knob to turn on the radio.
Push the On/Volume control knob a second time to turn
off the radio. 4
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the On/Volume control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
RES Radio
SEEK Buttons 3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side Tune/
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next Scroll control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch begin to blink.
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Scroll
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
control knob. Press the Tune/Scroll control knob to save
time change.
stations without stopping, until you release it.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button and the time of day will display. In RW/FF
AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switch Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
between the time and frequency displays. causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
1. Press and hold the TIME button, until the hours blink.
TUNE Control
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/Scroll Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to
control knob. increase, or counterclockwise to decrease, the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a fifth time and
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob and BASS will FADE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to
display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to the right or the left or right to adjust the sound level between the
left to increase or decrease the bass tones. front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a second time Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob again to exit
and MID will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob setting tone, balance, and fade.
to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range 4
AM/FM Button
tones.
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a third time and
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
TREBLE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
Memory
to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a fourth time commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
and BALANCE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
right or left side speakers. this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press MP3 Audio Play
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
NOTE:
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
pressing the pushbutton twice. recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
button number will display.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Buttons 1 - 6
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
stations).
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
DISC Button 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1. If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
CAUTION! the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it. 4
• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
NOTE: Ejecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on
CD player mechanism.
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism. SEEK Button
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
a second CD if one is already loaded. CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
can cause damage to the player.
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
CD, MP3 modes. Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
TIME Button
change of pace.
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
RW/FF
Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
the current CD track/title. Play.
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD Notes on Playing MP3 Files
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) file recording media and formats are limited. When
button works in a similar manner. writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode. Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems) exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. display.)
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor- • Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported. character extension)
4
The radio uses the following limits for file systems: • Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
• Maximum number of files: 255
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
display the file name and folder name, and will assign multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
a number instead. With a maximum number of files, longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats MPEG Specifi- Sampling Fre-

The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten- Bit Rate (kbps)
cation quency (kHz)
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 320, 256, 224,
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is MPEG-1 Audio 192, 160, 128,
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will 48, 44.1, 32
Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64,
not play the file. 56, 48, 40, 32
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to 160, 128, 144,
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the MPEG-2 Audio 112, 96, 80, 64,
24, 22.05, 16
Layer 3 56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
16, 8
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
VBR bit rate. are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode

When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
time to start playing the MP3 files. audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following: Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to 4
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
increase with more files and folders
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a OFF).
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
SALES CODE RES/RSC — AM/FM STEREO Operating Instructions — Radio Mode

RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND
SIRIUS RADIO
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
Push the On/Volume control knob to turn on the radio.
Push the On/Volume control knob a second time to turn
off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
On/Volume control knob to the right increases the vol-
ume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
RES/RSC Radio
SEEK Buttons Phone Button (UConnect威 Hands-Free Phone) — If

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next Equipped
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio (UConnect威) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
will remain tuned to the new station until you make Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
stations without stopping until you release it.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With 4
Voice Recognition System (Radio) — If Equipped UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in Section 3.
TIME Button
Voice Recognition Button (UConnect威 Hands-Free Press the TIME button and the time of day will display. In
Phone) — If Equipped AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switch
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone between the time and frequency displays.
(UConnect威) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
1. Press and hold the TIME button, until the hours blink.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/Scroll
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen. control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side Tune/ INFO Button
Scroll control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
begin to blink. letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Scroll
control knob. Press the Tune/Scroll control knob to save RW/FF
time change. Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. AM or FM frequencies.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
TUNE Control
SETUP button, use the Tune/Scroll control to select SET
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to
CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, starting at
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio,
press the SETUP button and then follow the above Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
procedure, starting at Step 2. Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob and BASS will
display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to the right or
left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a second time MUSIC TYPE Button
and MID will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
tones. or turning the Tune/Scroll control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a third time and
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
TREBLE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
Music Type information.
to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones. 4
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a fourth time
format types:
and BALANCE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control
knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the 16-Digit Character
Program Type
right or left side speakers. Display
No program type or un-
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a fifth time and None
defined
FADE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to Adult Hits Adlt Hit
the left or right to adjust the sound level between the
Classical Classicl
front and rear speakers.
Classic Rock Cls Rock
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob again to exit College College
setting tone, balance, and fade. Country Country
16-Digit Character 16-Digit Character

Program Type Program Type
Display Display
Foreign Language Language Sports Sports
Information Inform Talk Talk
Jazz Jazz Top 40 Top 40
News News Weather Weather
Nostalgia Nostalga By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
Oldies Oldies is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
Personality Persnlty station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Public Public Music Type function only operates when in the FM
Rhythm and Blues R&B mode.
Religious Music Rel Musc If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
Religious Talk Rel Talk (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
Rock Rock exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
SETUP Button SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
the following items: You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
you to set the clock. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
to adjust the hours and then press and turn the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
Tune/Scroll control knob to adjust the minutes. Press SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
4
the Tune/Scroll control knob again to save changes.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
AM/FM Button pressing the pushbutton twice.
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton button number will display.
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to Buttons 1 - 6
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations).
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto DISC/AUX Button
this station and press and release that button. If a button Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
MP3 Audio Play ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
NOTE:
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact CAUTION!
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
Inserting Compact Disc(s) CD player mechanism.
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD • Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into away and jam the player mechanism.
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the • RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than a second CD if one is already loaded.
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be • Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
ejected before a new disc can be loaded. other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD. button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD, MP3 modes.
TIME Button
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it. RW/FF 4
Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
the current CD track/title.
NOTE: Ejecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
SEEK Button another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the works in a similar manner.
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
AM/FM Button
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button) Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting When reading discs recorded using formats other than
change of pace. ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
domly selected track.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-
dom Play. • Maximum number of folder levels: 8
Notes On Playing MP3 Files • Maximum number of files: 255
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 • Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
file recording media and formats are limited. When names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric- of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
tions. display the file name and folder name and will assign
Supported Media (Disc Types) a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3. 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names: extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files 4
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). VBR bit rates.
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after MPEG Specifi- Sampling Fre-
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of Bit Rate (kbps)
cation quency (kHz)
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in 320, 256, 224,
longer disc loading times. MPEG-1 Audio 192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
Supported MP3 File Formats Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 160, 128, 144,
MPEG-2 Audio 112, 96, 80, 64,
24, 22.05, 16
Layer 3 56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Number of files and folders - Loading times will
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
supported. single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
time to start playing the MP3 files. turning the Tune/Scroll control knob. Selecting a folder
by pressing the Tune/Scroll control knob will begin
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
playing the files contained in that folder (or the next
by the following:
folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than playable files).
CD-R media
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
time⬙ priority mode. audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode) 4
more and the radio will display song titles for each file. Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
OFF).
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
(UConnect威) (If Equipped)
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
Section 3.
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
vehicle speakers. Equipped)
Refer to “Satellite Radio” in this section.
UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) — IF NOTE:

EQUIPPED • If the radio has a USB port, connecting an iPod威 to this
port does not play the media. For playing an iPod威,
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
use the separate 16–pin connector port (in the glove
REL/RET radios only with UConnect威. For sales code
compartment on some vehicles).
RER, REN and REZ touch-screen radio UCI feature, refer
to the separate RER, REN or REZ User’s Manual. UCI is • Connecting an iPod威 to the AUX port located in the
available only if equipped as an option with these radios. radio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the UCI
feature to control the connected device.
This feature allows you to plug an iPod威 into the
vehicle’s sound system through a 16–pin connector using Connecting The iPod姞
the provided interface cable. Use the optional connection cable to connect an iPod威 to
the vehicle’s 16–pin connector port (which is located in
UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威 and
the glove compartment on some vehicles). Once the
iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may not
iPod威 is connected and synchronized to the vehicle’s UCI
fully support the UCI features. Please visit Apple’s
system (iPod威 may take a few seconds to connect), the
website for software updates.
iPod威 starts charging and is ready for use by pressing
radio switches, as described below.
NOTE: • The iPod威 battery charges when plugged into the UCI
• You may have to remove the connector pin protection connector.
cap from the 16–pin connector port, prior to connect-
Controlling The iPod姞 Using Radio Buttons
ing the cable.
To get into the UCI (iPod威) mode and access a connected
• If the iPod威 battery is completely discharged, it may iPod威, press the ‘AUX’ button on the radio faceplate.
not communicate with the UCI system until a mini- Once in the UCI (iPod威) mode, iPod威 audio tracks (if
mum charge is attained. Leaving the iPod威 connected available from iPod威) start playing over the vehicle’s 4
to the UCI system may charge it to the required level. audio system.
Using This Feature Play Mode
By using the optional connection cable to connect an When switched to UCI mode, the iPod威 automatically
iPod威 to the vehicle’s UCI 16–pin connector port: starts Play mode. In Play mode, you may use the
following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the
• The iPod威 audio can be played on the vehicle’s sound
iPod威 and display data:
system, providing metadata (Artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display. • Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
previous track.
• The iPod威 can be controlled using the radio buttons to
Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents. • Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track.
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one jump to the previous track in the list, if you press this
click, during the first two seconds of the track, will button at any other time in the track it will jump to the
jump to the previous track in the list. Turning this beginning of the track. If you press the SEEK >>
button at any other time in the track, will jump to button during play mode, it will jump to the next track
the beginning of the current track. in the list.
• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and • While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW the associated metadata (Artist, track title, album, etc.)
button long enough will take you to the beginning for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
of the current track. to the next screen of data for that track. Once you have
seen all screens, the last INFO button press will take
• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
you back to the play mode screen on the radio.
holding the FF >> button.
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod威
• A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
mode to repeat the current playing track.
jump backward or forward respectively, for five
seconds. • Press the SCAN button to use iPod威 scan mode, which
will play the first five seconds of each track in the
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
current list and then forward to the next song. To stop
previous or next track. If the << SEEK button is
SCAN mode and start playing the desired track, when
pressed during the first two seconds of the track, it will
it is playing the track, press the SCAN button again.
During Scan mode you can also press the << SEEK the track to be played highlighted on the radio
and SEEK >> buttons to select the previous and next display, press the TUNE control knob to select and
tracks. start playing the track. Turning the TUNE control
knob fast will scroll through the list faster. During
• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
fast scroll, you may notice a slight delay in updating
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
the information on the radio display.
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威. If the RND icon is
showing on the radio display, then the shuffle mode is • During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in 4
ON. “wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the
bottom of the list just turn the wheel backwards
List Or Browse Mode
(counter-clockwise) to get to the track faster.
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, takes you to List mode. List mode enables you to • In List mode, the radio PRESET Buttons are used as
scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod威. shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威.
• TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions • Preset 1 – Playlists
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod威.
• Preset 2 – Artists
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclock-
• Preset 3 – Albums
wise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
the track detail on the radio display. Once you have • Preset 4 – Genres
• Preset 5 - Audiobooks • MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is

another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
iPod威.
• Pressing a PRESET button, will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on CAUTION!
the second line.
• Leaving the iPod威 (or any supported device) any-
• To Exit List mode without selecting a track, press the where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can
same PRESET button again to go back to Play alter the operation, or damage the device. Follow
mode. the device manufacturer’s guidelines.
• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top • Placing items on the iPod威, or connections to the
level menu of the iPod威. Turn the TUNE control knob iPod威 in the vehicle, can cause damage to the
to list the top-menu item you wish to select and press device and/or to the connectors.
the TUNE control knob. This will display the next
sub-menu list item on the iPod威 then you can follow WARNING!
the same steps to go to the desired track in that list.
Not all iPod威 sub-menu levels are available on this Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 while driving.
system. Failure to following this warning could result in an
accident.
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at
(REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU RADIOS ONLY) www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Cana-
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast- dian residents.
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Number (ESN/SID)
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
Please have the following information available when
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
calling: 4
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
Number (ESN/SID).
limited coverage in Alaska.
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
ESN/SID Access With REQ/RES Radios
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
come kit that contains general information, including
using the Tune/Scroll control knob until Sirius ID is
how to setup your on-line listening account at no addi-
selected. Press the Tune/Scroll control knob and the
tional charge. For further information, call the toll-free
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number Selecting Satellite Mode
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
the radio to exit this screen. CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
ESN/SID Access With REN/RER Radios
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio Satellite Antenna
faceplate. To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.
the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped).
All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the
ESN/SID Access With REU Radio antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger lug-
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward
faceplate. as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not
place items directly on or above the antenna.
Next, turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center
of the radio to scroll to Subscription, and then press and Reception Quality
release the joystick. All of the ESNs that apply to your Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
vehicle will display. following reasons:
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the SCAN Button (When Equipped)
form of short audio mutes. Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
cause intermittent reception.
button a second time.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
INFO Button — Except REU Radio
cause signal blockage.
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa- 4
Operating Instructions — Satellite Mode tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
SEEK Buttons to normal display).
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
INFO Button — REU Radio
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
Pressing the INFO button will display information about
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Pressing
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
the INFO button again will close the INFO screen.
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
RW/FF By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the channel with the same selected Music Type name.
direction of the arrows.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
TUNE Control (Rotary) (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button — REU Radio
MUSIC TYPE Button — Except REU Radio Pressing this button provides a MUSIC TYPES list from
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type which you can make a selection. Once a selection is
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button made, you can seek up, or down, or scan the channels
or turning the Tune/Scroll control knob within five and the radio will tune to the next station matching the
seconds will allow the program format type to be se- selected format. There is no time-out for this screen.
lected. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the
MUSIC TYPE screen. Once closed, seek up, seek down,
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
and scan will no longer be based on your selection.
type.
SETUP Button window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
following items: pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2 memory
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/ can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the button number will display.
Sirius subscription.
Buttons 1 - 6 4
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone (If
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel Equipped)
and press and release that button. If a button is not Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but- Section 3.
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
Operating Instructions — Video Entertainment
stored into pushbutton memory.
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)™
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press Guide.”
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
KICKER姞 HIGH PERFORMANCE SOUND SYSTEM “Audio Surround” is optimized for front seat passengers
WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE SURROUND (DSS) – for any audio source. This surround effect is available for
IF EQUIPPED audio from any source – AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or
AUX – and is activated through the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Driver-Selectable
Surround Sound (DSS)” under “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
DSS modes for audio sources are “Stereo” and “Audio
Surround,” which is surround sound equalized for the
front seat occupants. Please note that DSS effects are
dependent on the mix of the original recording. Some
audio will sound better in DSS modes, others in Stereo
mode.
When in “Audio Surround” mode, balance is set auto-
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art audio matically. Fader control is available to add more sur-
amplifier that provides 5.1-channel surround sound from round audio if desired.
any stereo audio source. A new feature of the Kicker威
audio system offers the ability to choose surround sound
for any audio source.
SIRIUS BACKSEAT TV™ — IF EQUIPPED • A diagonal 7 in (17.8 cm) Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
Satellite video uses direct satellite receiver broadcasting screen integrated into the center console armrest. The
technology to provide streaming video. The subscription screen features brightness control for optimum day-
service provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio. SIRIUS Backseat time and nighttime viewing.
TV™ offers three video channels for family entertainment,
directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: SIRIUS service is not available in Hawaii and 4
has limited coverage in Alaska.
Refer to your Video Entertainment System (VES)™, RER
Navigation or REN Multimedia User Manuals for de-
tailed operating instructions.
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ — IF

EQUIPPED
The optional Video Entertainment System (VES)™ includes
the following components for rear seat entertainment: Opening the Rear Seat VES™
• The LCD screen swings up from the rear of the armrest • The touch screen radio and DVD player controls allow
to allow the rear seat passenger(s) to view the display. front seat operation for easy setup in the case of
younger rear seat passengers.
• A battery-powered infrared remote control snaps into
a molded compartment in the center console armrest
upper storage bin.
VES™ Video Screen

NOTE: Close the armrest after the LCD screen has been
raised to its viewing position.
VES™ Remote Control

• Two wireless infrared headsets allow rear seat passen- REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
gers to listen to the same or individual audio sources. EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the
Audio/Video RCA Jacks (AUX Jacks)
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock
on the rear of the center console enable
positions.
the monitor to display video directly
from a video camera, connect video
games for display on the screen, or 4
play music directly from an MP3
player.
1. Video in (yellow)
2. Left audio in (white)
3. Right audio in (red)
NOTE: Refer to your “Vehicle Entertainment System
(VES)™ Users Manual” for detailed operating instruc-
tions.
Remote Sound System Controls
The remote sound system controls are located on the Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock Compass/Temp/Audio screen. This screen
positions. displays radio and media mode information
Vehicles equipped with steering wheel-mounted buttons AUDIO depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
MODE
are also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information
Button
Center (EVIC). The EVIC features a driver-interactive
display which is located in the instrument cluster. If the Compass/Temp/Audio screen is already displayed
The VOLUME button controls the sound level when the AUDIO MODE button is pressed, then the
of the sound system. Press the top of the mode will change (i.e. from AM to FM, to Media mode,
VOLUME button to increase the sound level. etc., depending on which radio is in the vehicle).
VOL- Press the bottom of the VOLUME button to When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/
UME decrease the sound level. Audio screen, press the FUNCTION SELECT
Button button to operate various radio, media, and
FUNC- Universal Customer Interface (UCI) functions
TION (i.e., advance presets, select next folder, jump to
SELECT or start playing songs in playlists, etc., depend-
Button ing on which radio is in the vehicle and if
equipped with UCI).
When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/ 5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
Audio screen, press the SCROLL button to seek 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
up and down radio stations, tracks, chapters,
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
SCROLL files, etc., depending on which radio is in the
too high.
Button vehicle.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
CD/DVD MAINTENANCE lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e. scratched, reflective
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) 4
precautions: oversized, or have theft protection encoding. Try a
known good disc before considering disc player service.
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface. RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being ON in
wiping from center to edge. your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
ing the disc. is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
or antistatic sprays. antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS Blower Control

The air conditioning and heating system is designed to The rotary knob on the left controls the
make you comfortable in all types of weather. blower. The control has an OFF posi-
tion and four speed settings. The
Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System
blower will remain on until the con-
trol is turned to the OFF position or
the ignition is turned OFF.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the

climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position.
Manual Temperature Controls

Temperature Control • Defrost

The rotary knob in the center controls Air is directed to the windshield through the
air temperature. Rotate the control to outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also
the left for cooler air temperature and directed to the front door windows through the side
to the right for warmer air tempera- window demister grilles.
ture. Rotating the control to the ex-
NOTE: To improve fuel economy, leave in defrost only
treme left provides the coldest setting.
when necessary. 4
Rotating the control to the extreme
right provides the warmest setting. • Defrost/Floor
Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets
Mode Control
and the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is
The rotary knob on the right controls
also directed to the front door windows through the
airflow distribution. Dots between
side window demister grilles.
each of the mode selections identify
intermediate modes that allow the op- • Floor
erator to fine-tune airflow distribu- Air flows through the floor outlets located under
tion. The mode settings are as follows: the instrument panel and into the rear seating area
through vents under the front seats.
• Bi-Level re-used. Use this mode to cool the inside of the vehicle
Air flows through the outlets located in the instru- rapidly. The Recirculation mode can also be used to
ment panel and through the outlets located on the temporarily block out outside odors, smoke, and dust.
floor. Air flows through the registers in the back of the
Air Conditioning Control
center console to the rear seat passengers. These registers
Press this button to turn on and turn off the air
can be closed to partially block airflow.
conditioning. When the air conditioning is turned
• Panel on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the
Air flows through the outlets located in the instru- outlets selected with the mode control. Press this button
ment panel. Air flows through the registers in the a second time to turn off the air conditioning. An
back of the center console to the rear seat passengers. indicator in the button will illuminate when compressor
These registers can be closed to block airflow. operation is selected.
• Recirculation Control
The mode control knob also controls the recir-
culation feature. You can choose Bi-Level Re-
circulation air outlets, Panel Recirculation air
outlets, or a mix or both while in this mode.
Normally, air enters from outside the vehicle. However,
when in Recirculation mode air inside the vehicle is
Automatic Temperature Control — If Equipped the controls on the climate control, from a dual sun-
sensor located in the top of the instrument panel, from an
infrared sensor located in the face of the climate control,
and from various sensors located throughout the vehicle.
The controls on the climate control provide the system
with operator input. The dual sun-sensor monitors sun
load coming through the windshield. The infrared sensor 4
independently measures the surface temperature of the
driver and passenger. Other sensors take into account
vehicle-speed, A/C pressure, outside temperature, and
engine cooling temperature. Using all of these inputs, the
system automatically adjusts airflow temperature, air-
flow distribution, airflow volume, and the amount of
Automatic Temperature Controls
outside air recirculation. This maintains a comfortable
Automatic Operation temperature even under changing conditions.
The Infrared Dual-Zone Climate Control System auto- Operation of the system is quite simple. Begin by turning
matically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle the mode control knob (on the right) to AUTO, and place
at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger. the blower control knob (on the left) to either LO AUTO
To accomplish this, the system gathers information from
or HI AUTO. The LO AUTO position should be used for Air conditioning in this system is automatic.
front seat occupants only. The HI AUTO position should Pressing the air conditioning control button while
be used when more airflow is desired, or when rear seat in AUTO mode will cause the indicator in the
occupants are present. Then, dial in the temperature you control button to flash three times and then turn off. This
would like the system to maintain by rotating the driver indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and request-
or passenger temperature control knob. Once the comfort ing the air conditioning is not necessary.
level is selected, the system will maintain that level
The system will automatically control recircu-
automatically using the heating system. Should the de-
lation. However, pressing the recirculation con-
sired comfort level require air conditioning, the system
trol button will temporarily put the system in
will automatically make the adjustment.
Recirculation mode (10 minutes). This can be
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors,
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting dust, or high humidity are present. Activating recircula-
the OFF position on the fan control stops the system tion will cause the indicator in the control button to
completely and closes the outside air intake. illuminate. After 10 minutes, the system will return to
normal AUTO mode function and the indicator will turn
72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum
off.
comfort for the average person; however, this may vary.
NOTE: The temperature setting can be adjusted at any
time without affecting automatic operation.
NOTE: Manual Operation

• The surface of the climate control panel and the top This system offers a full complement of manual override
center of the instrument panel should be kept free of features, which consist of blower preferred automatic,
debris due to the location of the climate control mode preferred automatic, or blower and mode preferred
sensors. Mud on the windshield may also cause poor automatic. This means the operator can override the
operation of this system. blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
• Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows 4
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
to fog. If the interior of the windows begin to fog, press
rotating the blower control knob (on the left).
the recirculation button to return to outside air. Some
temp/humidity conditions will cause captured inte- NOTE: Please read the automatic temperature control
rior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility. operation chart that follows for details.
For this reason, the system will not allow recirculation
to be selected while in Defrost or Defrost/Floor mode.
Attempting to use the recirculation while in these
modes will cause the indicator in the control button to
blink and then turn off.
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to • Bi-Level

change airflow distribution by rotating the mode control Air flows through the outlets located in the instru-
knob (on the right) to one of the following positions. ment panel and through the outlets located on the
floor. Air flows through the registers in the back of the
• Defrost
center console to the rear seat passengers. These registers
Air is directed to the windshield through the
can be closed to block airflow.
outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also
directed to the front door windows through the side • Panel 4
window demister grilles. Air flows through the outlets located in the instru-
ment panel. Air flows through the registers in the
• Defrost/Floor
back of the center console to the rear seat passengers.
Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets
These registers can be closed to block airflow.
and the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is
also directed to the front door windows through the • Air Conditioning Control
side window demister grilles. Press this button to turn on the air conditioning
during manual operation only. When the air con-
• Floor
ditioning is turned on, cool dehumidified air will
Air flows through the floor outlets located under
flow through the outlets selected with the mode control
the instrument panel and into the rear seating area
dial. Press this button a second time to turn off the air
through vents under the front seats.
conditioning. An indicator in the button illuminates Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes
when manual compressor operation is selected. will cause the indicator in the control button to blink and
then turn off.
NOTE: To control the air conditioning manually, the
mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position. Operating Tips
• Recirculation Control NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
This button can be used to block out smoke, suggested control settings for various weather condi-
odors, dust, high humidity, or if rapid cooling tions.
is desired. The Recirculation mode should only
Summer Operation
be used temporarily. An indicator in the button
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
illuminates when the Recirculation mode is active. You
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
may use this feature separately.
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
NOTE: Extended use of recirculation may cause the against engine overheating. A 50% solution of ethylene
windows to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended. Refer
fog, press the recirculation button to return to outside air. to “Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7 for proper
Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured coolant selection.
interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibil-
ity. For this reason, the system will not allow recirculation
to be selected while in Defrost or Defrost/Floor mode.
Winter Operation NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is long periods, as fogging may occur.
not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
Outside Air Intake
Vacation Storage Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In 4
fresh air and high blower setting. This will insure ad- Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
equate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of slush, and snow.
compressor damage when the system is started again.
A/C Air Filter
Window Fogging The climate control system filters outside air containing
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re- dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear Section 7 for filter replacement instructions.
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-
dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions

STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
▫ Keyless Go (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 ▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 321
5
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 ▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual
Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
▫ Extremely Cold Weather
(Below -20°F Or -29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 ▫ 4-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . 323
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 ▫ 5-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . 328
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 䡵 AutoStick威 — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 318 ▫ AutoStick威 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 All-Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped . . . . . . 333 ▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 343
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 ▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 343
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 ▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 ▫ Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . 344
䡵 Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 ▫ Synchronizing ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 ▫ ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light And
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 ESP/TCS Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 䡵 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 ▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
䡵 Multi-Displacement System (MDS) ▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 352
— 5.7L Engine Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 ▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 353
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 䡵 Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
䡵 Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 ▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 343
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 369
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 359 ▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 ▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 374
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . 361 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
▫ Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 361 䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 ▫ 2.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 ▫ 3.5L And 5.7L Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 5
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 ▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 ▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
䡵 Self-Sealing Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 366 ▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 381
䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 ▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 ▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 368 ▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 ▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 ▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 ▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 386
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
䡵 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . 387
䡵 Recreational Towing
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . 387
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
▫ Two-Wheel Drive Ony . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
▫ All-Wheel Drive Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if • Be sure to turn OFF the engine and remove the key
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat from the ignition switch if you want to rest or
belts. sleep in your car. Accidents can be caused by
inadvertently moving the shift lever. Accidents
WARNING! can also be caused by pressing the accelerator
pedal. This may cause excessive heat in the ex-
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving haust system, resulting in overheating and vehicle
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a fire, which may cause serious or fatal injuries. 5
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in Automatic Transmission
the ignition. A child could operate power win- The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle. position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
• Do not leave animals or children inside parked before shifting into any driving gear.
vehicles in hot weather; interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
Keyless Go (If Equipped)

CAUTION!
This function allows the driver to op-
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow- erate the ignition switch with the push
ing precautions are not observed: of a button, as long as the ENGINE
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to START/STOP button is installed and
a complete stop. the Keyless Go ignition key (FOBIK)
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the can be detected inside of the vehicle.
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed. Removing and Re-Installing the Engine Start/Stop
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL Button
into any forward gear when the engine is above The ENGINE START/STOP button may be removed
idle speed. from the receptacle to allow the vehicle ignition to be
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot controlled conventionally by inserting the FOBIK. The
is firmly on the brake pedal. button may be removed using the valet key from the
FOBIK as a thin tool. Insert the metal part of the valet key
under the chrome bezel at the 6 o’clock position, and
gently pry the button loose.
To reinstall the button, position it with its lettering Normal Starting

oriented horizontal and readable. Gently insert the but-
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
ton into the receptacle by pressing on the center of the
button. If the button slips in easily, it has been installed NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
correctly. Press firmly on the center of the button to seat engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the
the button into the receptacle. accelerator pedal.
The ENGINE START/STOP button should only be re- To start the engine, the transmission must be in PARK or
moved or inserted with the ignition in the OFF position. NEUTRAL. From any ignition state, press and hold the
brake pedal while pressing the ENGINE START/STOP 5
Keyless Go Functions — With Driver’s Foot Off
button. The system takes over and attempts to start the
The Brake Pedal (In PARK Position)
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once (ACC disengage automatically after 10 seconds. If you wish to
position) to activate the radio, wipers, and windows. stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine
starting, press the button again.
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice (ON
position) to activate the heating/air conditioning Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
(HVAC) controls, and the instrument cluster.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button three times engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the
(OFF position) to turn off the ignition switch. accelerator pedal.
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated Extremely Cold Weather (Below -20°F or -29°C)
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
If Engine Fails To Start
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in
10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the
WARNING!
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
normal starting procedure. • Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
START/STOP Button
causing serious personal injury.
Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button. If the shift lever is not in (Continued)
PARK, the ENGINE START/STOP button must be held
for two seconds and the ignition state changes to ACCES-
SORY (ACC). Regardless if the ignition state changes to
ACCESSORY (ACC) or OFF, the engine is shut off.
and hold the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
with your right foot, and then press and release the
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get ENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the engine has started, ignite and damage the the normal starting procedure.
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a dis-
charged battery, booster cables may be used to Clearing A Flooded Engine - Using Fob With Integrated
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery Key 5
in another vehicle. This type of start can be dan- If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
gerous if done improperly. Refer to Section 6 for “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-
proper jump-starting procedures and follow them dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
carefully. the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
Clearing A Flooded Engine - Using ENGINE release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
START/STOP Button will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proce- switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press repeat the normal starting procedure.
CAUTION! WARNING!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 sec- Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
onds before trying again. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
decrease as the engine warms up.
CAUTION!
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a ing precautions are not observed:
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a • Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
grounded, three-wire extension cord. a complete stop.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on • Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power is at idle speed.
Module. (Continued)
General Information
The automatic transmission selects individual gears au-
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL tomatically, dependent upon:
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed. • Altitude
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot • Vehicle loading
is firmly on the brake pedal.
• Driving style
WARNING! • Shift lever position

5
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or • Accelerator position
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle • Vehicle speed
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in The gear shifting process is continuously adapted, de-
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit pendent on the driving style, the driving situation, and
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the the road characteristics.
engine is idling normally and when your right foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
NOTE: The shift lever is automatically locked while in the PARK

• After selecting any driving position, wait a moment to position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating, position, the brake pedal must be firmly depressed before
especially when the engine is cold. the shift lock will release.
• If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle Move the shift lever to the desired position only when the
the key to the LOCK position before restarting. Trans- engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied.
mission engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds Do not release the brake pedal until ready to drive. The
after restart if the key is not cycled to the LOCK vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the shift
position first. lever is in DRIVE or REVERSE position.
• The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating. Therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the
break-in period. This is a normal condition, and pre-
cision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles.
This may result in a slightly different feeling or response

WARNING!
during normal operation in DRIVE position. After the
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure transmission cools down, it will return to normal
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, operation.
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
shift the transmission into PARK, remove the key
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the
from the ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once
PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
the key is removed from the ignition, the transmis-
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK 5
sion shift lever is locked in the PARK position,
position, the ignition switch must be turned to the
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
ON/RUN position, and the brake pedal must be
Furthermore, you should never leave unattended
depressed.
children inside a vehicle.
Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual Override
Over-Temperature Mode There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move
The transmission electronics constantly monitor the the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical
transmission oil temperature. If the transmission exceeds system malfunction occurs (i.e., dead battery). To access
normal operating temperature, the transmission will the override, remove the rubber tray from the storage bin
change the way it shifts to help control the condition.
located to the right of the shift lever. The override access To activate the override, first insert the key into the
port is at the top of the bin to the right of the shift lever ignition switch and turn it to the ON position. Then,
gate. press the pink-colored tab through the access port with a
small flat blade screwdriver or alike. While pressing the
override, move the shift lever out of the PARK position.
When complete, return the rubber tray to its original
position.
With Keyless Go — If Equipped
To activate the override, with a valid keyfob (FOBIK)
inside of the vehicle, and without the brake pedal
pressed, press the START/STOP button once to go to the
ACC position, or twice to go to the ON position. Then,
press the pink-colored tab through the access port with a
small flat-bladed screwdriver or alike. While pressing the
override tab, move the shift lever out of the PARK
Interlock Manual Override
position. When complete, return the override cover to its
original position.
4-Speed Automatic Transmission

NOTE: Under extreme cold temperatures (-6°F (-21°C)
and when in DRIVE, transmission operation may be
briefly limited to only 2nd gear operation. Normal op-
eration will resume once the transmission temperature
has risen to a suitable level.
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake 5
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
Shift Lever
Gear Ranges
PARK
PARK supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the The following indicators should be used to ensure that
PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake. you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position:
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking • When shifting into PARK move the shift lever all the
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise way forward and left until it stops and is fully seated.
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
• Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of park. As an
panel to ensure it is in the P position.
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb
on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
CAUTION!
grade.
Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is
WARNING! moved out of PARK before the ignition is turned
from the LOCK to ON position.
Never use PARK position on an automatic transmis-
sion as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
REVERSE
apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard
Use REVERSE for moving the vehicle rearward. Always
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
stop before moving the shift lever to REVERSE, except
damage.
when rocking the vehicle.
NEUTRAL shifts and the best fuel economy. Select the “3” range
The engine may be started in this range. when frequent transmission shifting occurs when using
the Overdrive range, such as when operating the vehicle
CAUTION! under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, travel-
ing into strong head winds, or while towing heavy
Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason
trailers).
with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmis-
sion damage. NOTE:
• If the vehicle is started in cold temperatures, shifts into
Overdrive may be delayed. Normal Overdrive and 5
WARNING!
shifting operation will resume when the temperature
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the of the transmission reaches the appropriate tempera-
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe ture. Refer to the Note under “Torque Converter
practices that limit your response to changing traffic Clutch” later in this section.
or road conditions. You might lose control of the • If the transmission temperature gets too hot, the
vehicle and have an accident. transmission may downshift out of Overdrive or en-
gage Overdrive at higher vehicle speeds until the
“D” (Overdrive)
transmission cools down. After cooldown, Overdrive
This range should be used for most city and highway
will resume normal operation.
driving. It provides the smoothest up shifts and down
“3” (Third)
CAUTION!
This range eliminates shifts into Overdrive. The transmis-
sion will operate normally in 1st, 2nd, and 3rd while in Never race the engine with the brakes on and the
this range. The “3” position should also be used when vehicle in gear, and never hold the vehicle on an
descending steep grades to prevent brake system dis- incline without applying the brakes. These practices
tress. can cause overheating and damage to the transmis-
sion.
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor-
Torque Converter Clutch
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
sive shifting and heat buildup.
added to the automatic transmission in this vehicle. A
“L” (Low) clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
This range should be used for engine braking when at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly differ-
descending very steep grades. In this range, upshifts will ent feeling or response during normal operation in high
occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts gear. When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera-
occur earlier than in other gear range selections. tion, the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages.
NOTE: Transmission Limp Home Mode

• The torque converter clutch will not engage until the The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions.
transmission fluid and engine coolant is warm (usu- If a condition is detected that could cause damage, the
ally after 1–3 miles [1.6–4.8 km] of driving). Because transmission automatically shifts into second gear. The
engine speed is higher when the torque converter transmission remains in second gear despite the forward
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmis- gear selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will
sion is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is continue to operate. This reset feature allows the vehicle
considered a normal condition. Pulling the shift lever to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
into the “3” position will show that the transmission is damaging the transmission.
able to shift into and out of Overdrive. 5
If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can
• If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the be reset to regain all forward gears.
first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans-
• Stop the vehicle and shift into PARK.
mission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
transmission fluid partially draining from the torque • Turn the key to LOCK, then start the engine.
converter into the transmission. This is considered a
• Shift into DRIVE and resume driving.
normal condition and it will not cause damage to the
transmission. The torque converter will refill within
five seconds of shifting from PARK into any other gear
position.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-

mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diag-
nostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
5-Speed Automatic Transmission
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears. Shift Lever
Gear Ranges
PARK
PARK supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the The following indicators should be used to ensure that
PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake. you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position:
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking • When shifting into PARK, move the shift lever all the
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise way forward and left until it stops and is fully seated.
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
• Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As
panel to ensure it is in the P position.
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
CAUTION!
uphill grade. 5
Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is
WARNING! moved out of PARK before the ignition is turned
from the LOCK to ON position.
Never use PARK position on an automatic transmis-
sion as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
REVERSE
apply parking brake fully when parked to guard
Shift into REVERSE gear only when the vehicle is com-
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
pletely stopped.
damage.
NEUTRAL
WARNING!
In NEUTRAL, no power is transmitted from the engine to
the drive axle. When the brakes are released, the vehicle Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
can be moved freely (pushed or towed). Do not engage ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
NEUTRAL position while driving except to coast when practices that limit your response to changing traffic
the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g., on icy roads). or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have an accident.
The engine may be started in this range. Use this range
for starting your vehicle if it is moving or being towed.
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
CAUTION!
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason shifts and the best fuel economy.
with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in
The transmission automatically upshifts through 5th
transmission damage.
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs when using
the Overdrive range, such as when operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, travel- brought to a stop. After the vehicle has stopped, PARK,
ing into strong head winds, or while towing heavy REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. Sec-
trailers, use the AutoStick威 mode and select the “3” ond gear will operate in the DRIVE position. The Mal-
range. function Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures A reset feature is available to allow the vehicle to be
During cold temperature operation, you may notice driven to an authorized dealer for service. To reset the
delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission transmission, use the following procedure:
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-
1. Stop the vehicle.
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to 5
achieve maximum efficiency. 2. Move the shift lever to the PARK position.
Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode 3. Turn OFF the engine.
The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
If a condition is detected that could result in transmission
damage, the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode. 5. Restart the engine.
If vehicle acceleration worsens, or the transmission no
6. Move the shift lever to the desired range. If the
longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in
problem is no longer detected, the transmission will
the Limp Home Mode. In this mode, the transmission
return to normal operation.
will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom- AUTOSTICK姞 — IF EQUIPPED

mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your Autostick威 is a driver-interactive transmission that offers
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could the vehicle. Autostick威 allows you to maximize engine
recur. braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer
can also provide you with more control during passing,
as soon as possible.
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can trailer towing, and many other situations.
be reset to regain all forward gears.
Autostick姞 Operation
Permanent Transmission Limp Home Mode By placing the shift lever in the DRIVE position, it can be
Permanent Limp Home Mode will be activated if the moved from side to side. This allows the driver to select
transmission enters temporary Limp Home Mode three a higher or lower range of gears. Moving the shift lever to
times. Follow the reset procedure described under “Tem- the left (-) triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an
porary Transmission Limp Home Mode” in this section. upshift. The gear position will display in the instrument
In Permanent Limp Home Mode, PARK, REVERSE, and cluster on the transmission range indicator.
NEUTRAL will continue to operate. Second gear will
operate in the DRIVE position. The Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) may illuminate.
You can shift in or out of the Autostick威 mode at any time unlikely to occur. When specific road and environmental
without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. If you conditions require increased levels of road traction, the
choose the Overdrive mode, the transmission will oper- vehicle automatically shifts into AWD mode. Automatic
ate automatically, shifting between the five available AWD operation could be activated by outside tempera-
gears. When you wish to engage Autostick威, simply ture, wheel slip, or other predetermined conditions (there
move the shift lever to the right or left (D+/D-) while in may be a slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel
the DRIVE position. The transmission will remain in the slip condition occurs). AWD can also be manually se-
current gear until an upshift or downshift is chosen. lected by moving the shift lever into the Autostick威 mode
(+/-) or activating the windshield wipers for an extended
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED period of time. 5
This vehicle is equipped with an active on-demand All
Wheel Drive (AWD) system which makes available opti- NOTE: If the “t CASE” or “SERVICE AWD SYSTEM”
mum traction for a wide variety of road surface and warning message appears after engine start up, or during
driving conditions. The system minimizes wheel slip by driving, it means that the AWD system is not functioning
automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear properly and that service is required. Refer to “Electronic
wheels as necessary. Vehicle Information Center” in Section 4 of this manual.
To maximize fuel economy, your AWD vehicle automati-

cally defaults to Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) when road and
environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is
CAUTION! WARNING!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires. Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
size may cause failure of the front differential and/or wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
the transfer case. possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES (ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
Acceleration Traction
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip- When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
pery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull errati- wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
(driving) wheels. ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. Flowing/Rising Water
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
WARNING!
visible.
Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
stop. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
DRIVING THROUGH WATER

your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this 5
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
Driving through water more than a few inches/ fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Shallow Standing Water

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution • Driving through standing water may cause dam-
and Warning before doing so. age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-
ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
CAUTION! transmission/transaxle, axle, etc.) for signs of con-
tamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in
• Always check the depth of the standing water appearance) after driving through standing water.
before driving through it. Never drive through Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of appears contaminated, as this may result in further
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle. damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
• Determine the condition of the road or the path Vehicle Limited Warranty.
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in • Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
the way before driving through the standing wa- cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
ter. internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
POWER STEERING
WARNING!
The standard power steering system will give you good
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi- vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water. steering capability if power assist is lost.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi- If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop- still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes. 5
parking maneuvers.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
stranded. wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in that there is a problem with the power steering system.
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
passengers, and others around you. pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any
way damage the steering system.
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-

WARNING!
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
Continued operation with reduced power steering rized dealer.
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
No chemical flushes should be used in any power
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
steering system; only the approved lubricant may be
used.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
occur. not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in Section 7 for the correct fluid type.
MULTI-DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM (MDS) — 5.7L

WARNING!
ENGINE ONLY
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting Never use PARK position on an automatic transmis-
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load sion as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard
driver inputs or additional driving skills required. against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
NOTE: The MDS system may take some time to return
to full functionality after a battery disconnect.
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the
PARKING BRAKE PARK position first and then apply the parking brake. 5
The parking brake should always be applied when the When parking on a hill, it is important to apply the
driver is not in the vehicle. parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK,
otherwise the load on the transmission locking mecha-
nism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of
PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels
toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the The BRAKE light in the instrument cluster will turn on
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the when the parking brake is applied and the ignition
parking brake, push the parking brake pedal down and switch is ON.
then remove your foot from the pedal. To release the
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is
parking brake, push down on the parking brake pedal
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
and then release.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
Parking Brake
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
vehicle stability and brake performance under most clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps” debris, or panic stops.
the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
You also may experience the following when the brake
wheel lock-up.
system goes into Anti-Lock:
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
the rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater
short time after the stop),
control of available braking forces applied to the rear 5
axle. • The clicking sound of solenoid valves,
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you • Brake pedal pulsations, and
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
of the stop.
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is
working properly. This self check occurs each time the These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).

• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip- • The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ment that may be susceptible to interference ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
caused by improperly installed or high output braking or steering efficiency beyond that af-
radio transmitting equipment. This interference forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capa- tires or the traction afforded.
bility. Installation of such equipment should be • The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
performed by qualified professionals. those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident. planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just can prevent accidents.
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need • The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
to slow down or stop. never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
(Continued) the safety of others.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM

WARNING!
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that include ABS (Anti-Lock Brake The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
System), TCS (Traction Control System), BAS (Brake from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
Assist System), and ESP (Electronic Stability Program). traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
All four of these systems work together to enhance ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those re-
vehicle stability and control in various driving condi- sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
tions. very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) 5
The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrau- that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
lic brake pressure. This prevents wheel lock-up to help others.
avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in Section 5 of this Traction Control System (TCS)
manual. This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is
applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
Brake Assist System (BAS)

WARNING!
This system complements the ABS by optimizing the
vehicle braking capability during emergency brake ma- The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
neuvers. This system detects an emergency braking situ- from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
ation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those re-
can help reduce braking distances. sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe,
Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
others.
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESP
corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the flashes when the TCS is active. If the ESP/TCS Indicator
condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
maintain the desired path. accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
conditions.
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
WARNING!
does not match the intended path, the ESP applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
the condition of oversteer or understeer. from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the 5
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those result-
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ing from excessive speed in turns, driving on very
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, at-
appropriate for the steering wheel position. tentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must never
The ESP/TCS Indicator Light located in the
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that
instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as the
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes
others.
active. The ESP/TCS Indicator Light also
The ESP system has two available operating modes: ESP on again, momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch
and the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will turn off.
ESP On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESP. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESP system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
The ESP should only be turned OFF for specific reasons
as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a
more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also
intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This
mode disables the TCS portion of the ESP and raises the
threshold for ESP activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than what ESP normally allows. ESP OFF Switch
The ESP OFF switch is located on the switch bank in the NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
center of the instrument panel. To enter the “Partial Off” with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
mode, momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch and the sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
“ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the “Partial Off” mode by momentarily depressing the ESP
OFF switch. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off” ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and
mode is overcome, turn the ESP on again by momentarily ESP/TCS Indicator Light
depressing the ESP OFF switch. This may be done while The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is
the vehicle is in motion. combined with the BAS indicator. The ESP/
BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESP/
Synchronizing ESP
TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster
The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is
both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the
combined with BAS indicator. If the power
ON position. They should go out with the engine run-
supply is interrupted (battery disconnected or
ning.
discharged), the ESP/BAS Malfunction Indica- 5
tor Light may illuminate with the engine running. If this The system will turn the ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator
should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to the Light on continuously while the engine running if it
left and then to the right. The ESP/BAS Malfunction detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or
Indicator Light should go out. However, if the light both. If the light remains on after several ignition cycles,
remains on, have the ESP and BAS checked at your and you have driven the vehicle several miles (kilome-
authorized dealer as soon as possible. ters) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), and the
ESP is synchronized (refer to Synchronizing ESP), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE: TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

• The ESP/TCS Indicator Light and the ESP/BAS Mal-
Tire Markings
function Indicator Light will turn on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition switch is turned ON, the ESP
system will be on even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESP control system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is NORMAL; the sounds
will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Stan- 4 — Maximum Load

dards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
NOTE: • Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact

• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa- molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H. tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire 5
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
5
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN) located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You the weight referenced here.
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
of this manual. on your vehicle’s placard.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs NOTE:

(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs • The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
[295 kg]). late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
calculated in step 4.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 5
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
(392 kg).
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Safety
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading WARNING!
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
cause accidents.
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
overload them.
sult in tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can 5
Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure.
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
areas are affected by improper tire pressure: • Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve- driver’s side “B” Pillar.
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left. Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom- Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
mended cold tire inflation pressure. maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Economy Information” section of this manual.
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
consumption. properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per

CAUTION!
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al- when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
ways reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This the Winter.
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
outside temperature condition. 5
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
temperature changes. tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- Radial Ply Tires
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading WARNING!
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
WARNING! on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or six, in case
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a them with other types of tires.
serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
75 mph (120 km/h). the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
on the vehicle at any given time.
stalled at the first opportunity.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only.
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the 5
With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
(80 km/h). Temporary use spare tires have limited
result.
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
use on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited-
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
use spare tire warning label located on the limited-use
spare tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare Tire Spinning

tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire, When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
vehicle at the first opportunity. or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck.
WARNING!
WARNING!
The limited-use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
than 50 mph (80 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
limited-use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace 30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
(or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
result in loss of vehicle control. speed.
Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
replaced. tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to: 5
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-

WARNING!
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. “Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
You could lose control and have an accident resulting Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
in serious injury or death. The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
with oil, grease, and gasoline. that you contact your original equipment or an autho-
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
Replacement Tires
specifications or capability.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus- failure and loss of vehicle control.
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and CAUTION!
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen- Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
sion components. You could lose control and have may result in false speedometer and odometer read- 5
an accident resulting in serious injury or death. ings.
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
(Continued)
SELF-SEALING TIRES — IF EQUIPPED

CAUTION!
A non-hardening viscous sealant applied to the inner
liner of each tire fills punctures up to 0.19 in (5 mm) to To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
minimize the loss of air pressure. This contributes to the following precautions:
safety of the vehicle by significantly reducing the prob- • Because of restricted chain clearance between tires
ability of a roadside stop due to a flat tire. and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Bro-
TIRE CHAINS ken chains can cause serious damage. Stop the
Use only compact chains or other traction aids that meet vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
SAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be the indicate chain breakage. Remove the damaged
proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain parts of the chain before further use.
manufacturer. In addition, only install tire chains on
• Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as
P215/65 R17 and P225/60 R18 size tires. The P245/45
possible and then retighten after driving about 1⁄2
R20 size tires do not provide adequate clearance for tire
mile (0.8 km).
chains.
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire. • Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Use on rear wheels only.
(Continued)
Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both

the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer sug-
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave- gest a maximum speed. This notice applies to all chain
ment. traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on the method of installation, operating speed, SNOW TIRES
and conditions for use. Always use the lower Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
suggested operating speed of the chain manufac- during the winter. Standard tires are of the all season type
turer if different from the speed recommended by and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
the manufacture. designation on the tire sidewall. 5
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
NOTE: In order to avoid damage to tires, chains, and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
in sets of four. Failure to do so may adversely affect the
pavement. Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instruc-
safety and handling of your vehicle.
tions on method of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for usage. Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h).
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
terns. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile
with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
tain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your

type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permis-
sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
formed.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom- limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
mended cold placard pressure. and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illu- 5
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least minates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1 km) after a three recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically
exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the
tire sidewall. Refer to the “Tires – General Information” system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
in this section for information on how to properly inflate may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be tion.
no adjustment for this increased pressure.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended

CAUTION!
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F • The TPMS has been optimized for the original
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire warning have been established for the tire size
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM operation or sensor damage may result when us-
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire ing replacement equipment that is not of the same
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres- equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
sure value. may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
NOTE: • Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,

• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure the tire.
or condition.
Base System
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
while adjusting your tire pressure. technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
readings to the receiver module. 5
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
stopping ability. tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain The TPMS consists of the following components:
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
• Receiver module,
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light. • Four TPM sensors, and
• TPM Telltale Light
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
equipped) has a TPM sensor. The matching full size spare 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
can be used in place of any of the four road tires. The TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare
Check TPMS Warning
when it is used in place of a road tire. Otherwise, a spare
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will
with a pressure below the low-pressure limit will not
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to
The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition
sound.
key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings system fault still exists. The TPM Telltale Light will turn
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when fault can occur due to any of the following:
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
active road tires. Should this occur, you should stop as
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire
the TPM sensors.
on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the 2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system materials that may block radio wave signals.
will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or NOTE:

wheel housings.
Vehicles with Compact Spare
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. 1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
compact spare tire.
NOTE: 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
Vehicles with Full Size Spare
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON. 5
has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
15 mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON.
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
(25 km/h) will turn off the TPM Telltale Light, as long as
no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit
in any of the four active road tires.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and The TPMS consists of the following components:
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
• Receiver module,
the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale
Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below • Four TPM sensors,
the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Elec-
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information. • TPM Telltale Light
Premium System — If Equipped The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless equipped) has a TPM sensor. The full size spare can be
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to used in place of any of the four road tires. A spare with a
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each pressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause the
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound.
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings

The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. In addition, the EVIC will display one or
more low pressure messages (Left Front, Left Rear, Right
Front, Right Rear) for three seconds and a graphic
showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values flashing.
5
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible Check TPMS Warning
and inflate all of the tires with low pressure (including If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will flash
those flashing in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The
recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three
will automatically update, the graphic display in the seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
EVIC will stop flashing, and the TPM Telltale Light will value to indicate which sensor is not being received.
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, NOTE:

providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
Vehicles with Full Size Spare
no longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no
has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
following:
upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON. In addition, the
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as EVIC will display a low pressure message and a graphic 5
the TPM sensors. showing the low tire pressure value flashing.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
15 mph (25 km/h) the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF,
materials that may block radio wave signals.
as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: 4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will

sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
Vehicles with Compact Spare
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
compact spare tire.
pressure value.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the TPM Telltale
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
Light will remain ON and a chime will sound. In
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the
addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a
EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes
flashing pressure value.
(- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
15 mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYS-
information.
TEM⬙ message for three seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
General Information FUEL REQUIREMENTS

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
2.7L Engine
The 2.7L Engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide excel-
• This device may not cause harmful interference. lent fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded “regular”
• This device must accept any interference received,
gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The
including interference that may cause undesired
use of premium gasoline is not recom-
operation.
mended. Under normal conditions, the use of premium 5
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow- gasoline will not provide a benefit over high-quality
ing licenses: regular gasolines, and in some circumstances may result
in poorer performance.
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
3.5L and 5.7L Engines as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
The 3.5L and 5.7L Engines are designed to ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
meet all emissions regulations and provide before considering service for the vehicle.
satisfactory fuel economy and perfor-
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
mance when using high-quality unleaded
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World
gasoline having an octane range of 87 to
Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
89. The manufacturer recommends the use
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
of 89 octane for optimum performance. The use of
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
premium gasoline is not recommended. Under normal
mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci-
conditions, the use of premium gasoline will not provide
fications, if they are available.
a benefit over high-quality regular and mid-grade gaso-
lines, and in some circumstances may result in poorer Reformulated Gasoline
performance. Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe-
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
prove air quality.
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso- Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro- E85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
fuel system components. methanol, it does not have the negative effects of
methanol.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen- Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions. content may void the vehicle’s warranty. 5
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
your vehicle.
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
CAUTION! • operate in a lean mode
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 • OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
• poor engine performance
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components. • poor cold start and cold drivability
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
E-85 perform the following: the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
• change the engine oil and oil filter
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
• disconnect and reconnect the battery United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor-
nia reformulated gasoline.
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
Materials Added to Fuel
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
exposure to E-85 fuel.
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
MMT In Gasoline detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is conditions and they would result in additional cost.
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage fuel.
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
Fuel System Cautions Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems

resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
CAUTION! the responsibility of the manufacturer.
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions con-
performance: trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance
and damage the emissions control system. 5
WARNING!
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition mal-
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
functions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light
monoxide poisoning:
smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunc-
tioning and may require immediate service. Contact
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
your authorized dealer for service assistance.
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
products contain high concentrations of methanol. engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for edge) of the fuel filler door to access the fuel filler cap. If
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. cap is for use with this vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
• Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex-
haust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the Fuel Filler Door
left side of the vehicle. Push in on the left side (near the
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
CAUTION!
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler cap door
reinforcement. • Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
• A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
5
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
Gas Cap Tether Hook

• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel

WARNING!
tank is full.
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
tank filled.
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is “Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
running. Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). If this occurs, tighten
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOM-
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You ETER button to turn off the message. If the problem
could be burned. Always place gas containers on continues, the message will appear the next time the
the ground while filling. vehicle is started.
NOTE: A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap

• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound. may also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened System” in Section 7.
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is
refueled.
VEHICLE LOADING • Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear

The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
the “Vehicle Certification Label.” This information
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as • Type of Vehicle
indicated.
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Vehicle Certification Label
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. 5
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
the rear of the driver’s door.
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
The label contains the following information: GVWR.
• Name of manufacturer Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
• Month and year of manufacture
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
WARNING!
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is evenly over the front and rear axles.
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
GVWR.
Overloading Loading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
front and rear GAWR. evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
it is not over the GVWR.
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
NOTE: Common Towing Definitions

• Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to the The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR and you in understanding the following information:
GAWRs.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Refer to the “Tire Placard” for your vehicle’s proper The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
tire pressure. This includes driver, passengers, cargo, and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
TRAILER TOWING exceed the GVWR.
In this section, you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) 5
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
review this information to tow your load as efficiently cargo, consumables, and equipment (permanent or tem-
and safely as possible. porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve- vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
hicles used for trailer towing. supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) Tongue Weight (TW)

The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball
and trailer when weighed in combination. (Note that by the trailer. In most cases, it should not be less than 10%
GCWR ratings include a 150 lbs [68 kg] allowance for the or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider
presence of a driver.) this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) Frontal Area
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles width of the front of a trailer.
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
Trailer Sway Control
rear GAWR.
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
WARNING!
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition swaying motions while traveling.
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Weight-Carrying Hitch equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue

A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or and trailer configuration / loading to comply with Gross
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and medium- WARNING!
sized trailers.
• An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch
Weight-Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling, stability, braking
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever- performance, and could result in an accident. 5
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used • Weight distributing systems may not be compat-
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the ible with surge brake couplers. Consult with your
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable rec-
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro- reational vehicle dealer for additional
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent information.
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
Trailer Hitch Classification Trailer Hitch Classification

Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of Class Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional Wt.)
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your authorized dealer for
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
package content.
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
The following chart provides the industry standard for Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the drivetrain.
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer your vehicle.
Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum GTW towable
for your given drivetrain.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)

The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Max. GTW Max. Tongue Wt.
(Gross Trailer Wt.) (〫 see note)
2.7L & 3.5L Rear Wheel 22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
Drive (RWD) Automatic
3.5L All Wheel Drive 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)
(AWD) & 5.7L Automatic
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds 5
〫 NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo,
and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the “Tire and Loading Information” placard. Refer to “Tire–
Safety Information” in this section.
Trailer and Tongue Weight

Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8. When tow-
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional ing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR, or GCWR, ratings.
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. WARNING!
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
for your vehicle.
as safe as possible:
Towing Requirements Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain and it will not shift during travel. When trailering 5
components the following guidelines are recommended: cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
CAUTION! control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
• Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles have an accident.
(805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may dam-
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
age your vehicle.
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
• During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
loss of control, poor performance, or damage to
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspen-
sion, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your 3. GAWR

vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
slack for turning corners.
percentage of total trailer weight.)
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
Towing Requirements — Tires
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in − Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
PARK. Always, block or ⬙chock⬙ the trailer wheels. spare tire.
• GCWR must not be exceeded. − Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
“Tires–General Information” in this section for infor-
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
mation on tire pressures and for proper tire inflation
ratings are not exceeded:
procedures.
1. Max loading as defined on the “Tire and Loading
− Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
Information” placard.
pressures before trailer usage.
2. GTW
− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage − An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires–General Infor- required when towing a trailer with electronically
mation” in this section for information on tread wear actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
indicators and for the proper inspection procedure. a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
− When replacing tires, refer to “Tires–General Informa-
tion” in this section for information on replacement − Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
tires and for the proper tire replacement procedures. 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR 5
limits. CAUTION!
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes, and they
− Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
personal injury.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights and Wiring

WARNING!
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy- stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys- motoring safety.
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4- and 7-pin
when you need them and could have an accident.
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis- and connector.
tance. When towing, you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident. wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
4-Pin Connector 7-Pin Connector

1 — Female Pins 4 — Park 1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn 2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn 3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
Towing Tips Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If

Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, Equipped)
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
− Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
heavy traffic.
− When using the speed control, if you experience speed
Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. How-
you can get back to cruising speed.
ever, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the
“3” range should be selected. − Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor- Towing Tips — Autostick威 (If Equipped)
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
− By using the Autostick威 modes and selecting a specific
sive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
gear range, frequent shifting can be avoided. The
provide better engine braking.
highest gear range should be selected that allows for
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 min- adequate performance. For example, choose “4” if the
utes of continuous operation, then change the automatic desired speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or “2” if
transmission fluid and filter according to the interval needed to maintain the desired speed.
specified for “police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer tow-
ing” in the Maintenance Schedule.
− Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND

prevent excess heat generation. A reduction in vehicle MOTORHOME, ETC.)
speed may be required to avoid extended driving at
Two-Wheel Drive Ony
high RPM. Return to a higher gear range or vehicle
speed when road conditions and RPM level allows. RWD can be manually selected by shifting the shift lever
into the NEUTRAL position. This mode may be selected
Towing Tips — Cooling System
during such events as towing your vehicle with the rear
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
wheels off the ground.
heating, take the following actions:
All-Wheel Drive Only 5
− City Driving
Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended.
When stopped for short periods, put transmission in
NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed. NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing, make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
− Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
− Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . 406 ▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 6
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 ▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
▫ Jacking And Changing a Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
▫ Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
▫ Wheel Cover Or Center Cap Installation With A Tow Dolly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
(If Required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
404 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER Press the Hazard Warning flasher switch to activate the
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the flashers. When activated, all directional turn signals will
center of the instrument panel between the center air flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emer-
outlets. gency. Press the switch a second time to turn off the
flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition switch is in the LOCK position.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
Hazard Switch
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 405
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

CAUTION!
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac- Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
tion. your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
• On the highways — slow down.
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
• In city traffic — while stopped, put transmission in back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed. the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to WARNING! 6
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the temperature A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor, and others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
the fan control to high. This allows the heater core to act coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
from the engine cooling system. hood yourself, refer to Section 7 and follow the
warnings under the “Cooling System Pressure Cap”
paragraph.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

WARNING! • The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when slippery areas.
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
You could be crushed. Never get any part of your
cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start
and spare tire.
or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to
service center where it can be raised on a lift. access the jack.
(Continued) 1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap. 3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
6
Opening The Access Panel Spare Tire Fastener
4. Remove the spare tire.

WARNING!
5. Remove the fastener securing the jack.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
Preparations For Jacking

1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the shift lever into PARK.
Jack Fastener
4. Turn OFF the ignition.
5. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
6. Block the front and rear of the

wheel diagonally opposite of the jack-
ing position. For example, if changing • Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the right front tire, block the left rear the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
wheel. the vehicle.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle • Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
when the vehicle is being jacked. transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
Jacking and Changing a Tire
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack. 6
WARNING!
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to jack.
help prevent personal injury or damage to your • Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
vehicle: • Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
(Continued) for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
(Continued)
2. If equipped with steel wheels, do not remove the

wheel cover at this time. If equipped with aluminum
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely wheels where the center cap covers the lug nuts, use the
careful of motor traffic. lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated are raising the vehicle.
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
Jack Warning Label

1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
Center Cap Removal
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with the metal edges
and retention teeth.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to

loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with
the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn
while the wheel is still on the ground.
6
Lug Nut Removal/Installation
1 — Tighten
2 — Loosen
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange.
Jack Engagement Locations

5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire 8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the
and install the spare tire. nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. To
avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not
WARNING! tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to
the ground.
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and 9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough handle counterclockwise.
to remove the tire.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
6. Remove the lug nuts, wheel cover (if equipped), and
lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The
tire. Remove the cover by hand. Do not pry it off.
correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lb. (135 N·m). If 6
7. Mount the spare tire. in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a
NOTE: For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to
service station.
install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
However, when reinstalling the road tire, follow the 11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base
procedure under “Wheel Cover or Center Cap Installa- of the jack faces the rear of the vehicle before tightening
tion” in place of the remaining steps in this procedure. down the fastener.
• This tire is designed as an emergency spare only. Do

WARNING!
not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) speed.
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve- WARNING!
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
The limited-use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
Compact Spare Tire
than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire
The compact spare tire is for temporary emergency use
inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or
with radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
limited-use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
(or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
stalled at the first opportunity.
result in loss of vehicle control.
• Keep tire inflated to 60 psi (414 KPa) cold inflation
pressure.
Wheel Cover or Center Cap Installation (If

Required)
NOTE: Do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel
cover on the compact spare.
1. Mount the road tire on the axle. For vehicles equipped
with wheel covers, perform Steps 2 and 3. For vehicles
equipped with center caps, proceed to Step 4.
2. Install two lug nuts on the mounting studs, which are
on each side of the stud that is in alignment with the
valve stem. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end 6
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. Tire and Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not
1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover
tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to 2 — Valve Notch 5 — Mounting Stud
the ground. 3 — Wheel Lug Nut
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the 7. For vehicles equipped with center caps, install the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand, center cap by hand. Do not use a hammer or excessive
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use a force to install the center cap.
hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
8. Stow the jack, tools, and spare tire. Make sure the base
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped of the jack faces the rear of the vehicle before tightening
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug down the fastener.
nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is WARNING!
lowered to the ground.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
handle counterclockwise. hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The
correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lb. (135 N·m). If
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a
service station.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin, or cloth-
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when- ing. Don’t lean over battery when attaching
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If
ignition switch is ON. You can be hurt by the fan. acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush contami-
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get nated area immediately with large quantities of
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic water.
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned • A battery generates hydrogen gas, which is flam-
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once mable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away
the engine has started, ignite and damage the from the vent holes. 6
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a dis- • Do not use a booster battery or any other booster
charged battery, booster cables may be used to source with an output that exceeds 12-Volts.
obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of • The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
start can be dangerous if done improperly, so should not be disconnected and should only be
follow this procedure carefully. replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
(Continued)
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in 3. Set the parking brake, place the automatic transmis-
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the sion in PARK, and turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
engine compartment for jump-starting. position on both vehicles.
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry 4. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an cal loads.
inadvertent electrical contact.
5. Connect one end of the jumper cable to the remote
2. When boost is provided by a battery in another jump-start positive battery post (+) in the engine com-
vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach, but partment. Connect the other end of the same cable to the
do not allow the vehicles to touch one another. positive terminal of the booster battery. Refer to the
following illustration for jump-starting connections.
WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
6. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal

WARNING!
of the booster battery and then to the engine ground (-)
of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure • You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing
you have a good contact on the engine ground. Refer to or towing.
the following illustration for jump-starting connections. • Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode.
• During cold weather when temperatures are be-
low the freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged
battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump-starting
because the battery could rupture or explode. The
battery temperature must be brought above the
6
freezing point before attempting jump-start.
7. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster

battery. Let the engine idle a few minutes. Then, start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Jump-Starting
NOTE: Refer to ⬙Synchronizing ESP⬙ under ⬙Electronic FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

Stability Program⬙ in Section 5 if the ESP/BAS light (in If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
the instrument cluster) remains on continuously after can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
starting the engine of the vehicle with the discharged steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
battery. front wheels. Then shift back and forth between RE-
VERSE and DRIVE. Usually, the least accelerator pedal
8. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spin-
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
ning the wheels is most effective.
WARNING! NOTE: Turn OFF the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
— if equipped, or Traction Control System (TCS) — if
Any procedure other than above could result in:
equipped before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic
• Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out Stability Program” or “Traction Control System” in Sec-
the battery vent tion 5.
• Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion
• Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle
CAUTION! WARNING!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving be- Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
tween 1st and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
may result. one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck, and don’t let
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the speed.
wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
6
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only ap-
proved method of towing without the ignition key is
with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is neces-
sary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat

CAUTION!
Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground)
Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic • Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
transmission, is only permitted within the following with sling type towing equipment. Damage to the
limitations. front fascia will result.
With The Ignition Key • If the transmission is not operative or if the
Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi- vehicle is to be towed more than 30 miles (48 km),
tions: The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL, the distance then the only approved method of towing is with
to be traveled must not exceed 30 miles (48 km), and the a flatbed truck. Damage to the transmission may
towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). result.
Exceeding these towing limits may cause a transmission • Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to
gear failure. If the transmission is not operative or if the the rear sheet metal and fascia will occur.
vehicle is to be towed more than 30 miles (48 km), the • Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle must be transported using a flatbed truck. vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans-
mission may result.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)

while being towed, the key must be in the ON position,
not the ACC position. Make certain the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With
A Tow Dolly
The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow this
vehicle on a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 2.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
䡵 Engine Compartment — 3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 ▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
䡵 Engine Compartment — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 ▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 430 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 7
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
▫ A/C Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Windshield Washers/Headlight Washers 䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
▫ Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight,
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Park/Turn Light, Inner Park Light, And
Outer Park Light – 300 Models . . . . . . . . . . . 469
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
▫ Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight,
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
And Park/Turn Light – 300C . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
▫ Backup Light, Side Marker Light, And
▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped . . . . 454 Tail/Stop Turn Light — 300 Models . . . . . . . 472
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From ▫ Tail/Stop, Tail, Turn Signal Light, And
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Backup Light — 300C Models . . . . . . . . . . . 475
䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 ▫ License Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
▫ Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 䡵 Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . 462 䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 481
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.7L
1 — Integrated Power Module 6 — Air Cleaner Filter 7

2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 9 — Remote Jump-Start Positive Battery Post
5 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
1 — Integrated Power Module 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

2 — Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Coolant Pressure Cap 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
5 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 10 — Remote Jump-Start Positive Battery Post
1 — Integrated Power Module 6 — Air Cleaner Filter 7

2 — Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 9 — Remote Jump-Start Positive Battery Post
5 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic further damage to the emissions control system. It
transmission control systems. When these systems are could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis- can be performed.
sions well within current government regulations. If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- Loose Fuel Filler Cap
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
soon as possible. “Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the serviced, recently had a dead battery, or a battery replace-
problem continues, the message will appear the next time ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
the vehicle is started. ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
may also turn on the MIL. which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE do the following:
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass 1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. 2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. or start the engine.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte- 3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
nance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction this test over. 7
Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system 4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
is ready for testing. will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen: ready or not ready, if the MIL is illuminated during
normal vehicle operation, you should have your vehicle
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
engine running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station. REPLACEMENT PARTS
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
is ready , and you can proceed to the I/M station. caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your warranty.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
DEALER SERVICE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person- The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service services determined by the engineers who designed your
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are vehicle.
available which include detailed service information for
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
your vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attempting
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
any procedure yourself.
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
against you. These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
WARNING!
Engine Oil
You can be badly injured working on or around a
7
Checking Oil Level — 2.7L and 3.5L Engines
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of
dipstick. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of oil when the reading is oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range
engines. on these engines.
CAUTION! CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine. loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Checking Oil Level — 5.7L Engine Change Engine Oil

To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for
information on this system.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.7L and 5.7L
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months, Engines
whichever occurs first. SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
Engine Oil Selection
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in this section.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
This symbol means that the oil has SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
been certified by the American operation of the Multi-Displacement System (MDS). Re-
Petroleum Institute (API). The fer to “Multi-Displacement System” in Section 5 for more 7
manufacturer only recommends details.
API Certified engine oils.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.5L Engine Materials Added to Engine Oil
SAE 10W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak
temperatures. detection dyes, to your engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and its performance may be im-
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
paired by supplemental additives.
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
ment” in this section. Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
ber should not be used.
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
Synthetic Engine Oils where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom- your area.
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Engine Oil Filter

WARNING!
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change. The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
Engine Oil Filter Selection
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
near the engine compartment before starting the
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are a high quality oil
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
filter and are recommended.
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
proper maintenance intervals. The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters 7
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
The top of the maintenance-free battery is permanently
sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic
maintenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump-starting.
Battery Location

• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can • The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid should not be disconnected and should only be
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme- CAUTION!
diately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep • It is essential when replacing the cables on the
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use battery that the positive cable is attached to the
a booster battery or any other booster source with positive post and the negative cable is attached to
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
clamps to touch each other. tive (+) and negative (-) and identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the 7
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling. • If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
(Continued) before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance

For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer • The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
at the start of each warm season. This service should under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
time. should be done by an experienced technician.
WARNING! Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi- Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other service be performed by authorized dealers or other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
further warranty information. sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, and refrigerants.
(Continued)
A/C Air Filter MOPAR威 Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy opera-
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood, tion and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation. To excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
replace the filter, remove the access door in the cowl attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
screen by pressing the retaining clips. Slide the lid on the nents to insure proper function. When performing other
filter adapter forward and down and remove the used underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
filter. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
vehicle (text and arrows on the filter indicate this).
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR威
proper maintenance intervals. Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. 7
Body Lubrication Windshield Wiper Blades
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri- mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt blades clean. This will help blade performance.
from a dry windshield.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
Windshield Washers/Headlight Washers — If
Equipped The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 L) of washer
The windshield washer and the headlight washer (if fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in
equipped) share the same fluid reservoir. The fluid the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if
reservoir is located in the front of the engine compart- equipped).
ment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the
system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised

WARNING!
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care WARNING!
must be exercised when filling or working around
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
the washer solution.
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
Exhaust System
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
to “Exhaust Gas” under “Safety Tips” in Section 2.
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the catalyst as an emissions control device. 7
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
damage.
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
CAUTION! WARNING!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In materials that can burn. Such materials might be
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv- grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor- system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin- where your exhaust system can contact anything that
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe can burn.
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
vehicle. engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this should occur,
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop, shut the
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed engine OFF, and allow the vehicle to cool. Thereafter,
against you. obtain service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s
specifications immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage: Cooling System

• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
WARNING!
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion. • When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is tempera-
vehicle.
ture controlled and can start at any time the
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires ignition switch is in the ON position.
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic • You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions. you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling 7
system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, Cooling System — Drain, Flush, and Refill
flushed, and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser. rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for proper maintenance intervals.
leaks.
Selection of Coolant
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine cool-
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for ant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of ine Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than • This vehicle has not been designed for use with
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
result in engine damage and may decrease corro- freeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine
sion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, it should be replaced with the Adding Coolant
specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
possible. coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
to five years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the radiator engine
nance period, it is important that you use the same 7
engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your
coolant (antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using
(Continued) Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze).
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
will require more frequent engine coolant (antifreeze)
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
changes.
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology).
Cooling System Pressure Cap
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
(antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
(⫺37°C) are anticipated.
recovery bottle.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-

WARNING!
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre- to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a
caution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) child, contact a physician immediately. Clean up any
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or ground spills immediately.
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
Coolant Level
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
engine OFF and cold, the level of the coolant in the bottle
pressure.
should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en- The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
gine damage may result. no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for 7
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing en-
Disposal of Used Coolant gine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
with your local authorities to determine the disposal a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against
coolant bottle. Do not overfill. freezing.
Points to Remember • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor- 50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator. your engine, which contains aluminum components.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle. equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
• Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter Master Cylinder - Brake Fluid Level Check
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in if the brake system warning light indicates system fail-
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, ure.
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per-
Brake System forming underhood services.
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
system components should be inspected periodically.
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
proper maintenance intervals.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require-
WARNING! ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake 7
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
leak and a checkup may be needed.
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
braking capacity in an emergency. section for the correct fluid type.
Automatic Transmission
WARNING!
Fluid Level Check
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
required. For this reason, the dipstick is omitted.
brake fluid catching fire.
• Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction, have
boiling point, or is unidentified as to specification, your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level.
may result in sudden brake failure during hard
prolonged braking. You could have an accident. CAUTION!
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manu-
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
facturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterio-
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
ration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
moisture.
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than that recommended by the manufacturer
CAUTION!
will result in more frequent fluid and filter
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
the brake fluid. Seal damage may result. ine Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
(Continued)
Selection of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
• The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-
not require adjustment under normal operating mance. Use only manufacturer’s recommended transmis-
conditions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs, sion fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type. It is
damage to the transmission may occur. Your au- important that the transmission fluid be maintained at
thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the the prescribed level using the recommended fluid. No
fluid level accurately. chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;
only the approved lubricant may be used.
Fluid and Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for Special Additives
proper maintenance intervals. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the

product and its performance may be impaired by supple- 7
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
fluid and filter should be changed. tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
The all wheel drive system consists of a transfer case and
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
front differential. The exterior surface of these compo-
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
nents should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks.
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible.
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
The transfer case fluid fill/inspection plug is located in on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
the middle of the rear housing. To inspect the transfer highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
case fluid level, remove the fill/inspection plug. The parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami-
fluid level should be even with the bottom of the hole. nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
Use this plug to add fluid as required. extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi-
tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
The front differential fill plug is located on the outer
underbody protection.
cover near the halfshaft attachment. To inspect the differ-
ential fluid level, remove the fill plug. The fluid level The following maintenance recommendations will enable
should be even with or slightly below the bottom of the you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
hole. resistance built into your vehicle.
Fluid Changes What Causes Corrosion?
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
proper maintenance intervals. paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are: • Use MOPAR威 Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
• Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
scratch the paint.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
• Insects, tree sap, and tar. that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. CAUTION!
Washing Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
metal and painted surfaces.
hicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
Special Care 7
clear water.
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
a month.
and Tar Remover to remove.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges • Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
and open. has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
considered the responsibility of the owner. chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR威
similar cause, which destroys the paint and protective
Wheel Cleaner (05066247AB) or equivalent or select a
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only
sibility of the owner.
MOPAR威 or equivalent is recommended. Do not use
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’
packaged and sealed. protective finish.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider Interior Care
mud or stone shields behind each wheel. Use MOPAR威 Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric
upholstery and MOPAR威 Carpet Cleaner for carpeting.
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp

WARNING!
cloth, or MOPAR威 Satin Select. Do not use harsh cleaners
or Armorall. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean to clean vinyl Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
upholstery. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
MOPAR威 Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Cleaning Headlights
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To 7
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean lowed by rinsing.
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi-
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces 1. Clean with a wet soft rag or micro-fiber towel. A mild
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type with a clean damp rag.
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do Seat Belt Maintenance
not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
scratch the elements. solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR威 Total Clean, a
directly on the mirror. mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care buckles do not work properly.
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Cleaning the Center Console Cupholders

Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
with the cupholder in the center console.
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
FUSES
Integrated Power Module
The Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the
engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
relays.
Integrated Power Module

7
CAUTION! Cavity Car- Mini- Description

tridge Fuse
• When installing the integrated power module Fuse
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop- 1 — 15 Amp Washer Motor
erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so Blue
may allow water to get into the integrated power 2 — 25 Amp Powertrain Control
module and possibly result in an electrical system Neutral Module (PCM)
failure. 3 — 25 Amp Ignition Run/Start
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to Neutral
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. 4 — 25 Amp Alternator/EGR Sole-
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated Neutral noid
may result in a dangerous electrical system over- 5 — — —
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it 6 — 25 Amp Ignition Coils/Injectors/
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be Neutral Short Runner Valve
corrected. 7 — — —
8 — 25 Amp Starter
Neutral
9 — — —
Cavity Car- Mini- Description Cavity Car- Mini- Description

tridge Fuse tridge Fuse
Fuse Fuse
10 30 Amp — Windshield Wiper 15 50 Amp — Radiator Fan
Pink Red
11 30 Amp — Anti-Lock Brake System 16 — — —
Pink (ABS) Valves - If 17 — — —
Equipped 18 — — —
12 40 Amp — Radiator Fan 19 — — —
Green
20 — — —
13 50 Amp — Anti-Lock Brake System
Red (ABS) Pump Motor - If 21 — — —
Equipped 22 — — —
14 — — —
7
Rear Power Distribution Center

There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.
Rear Power Distribution Center
Opening The Access Panel

CAUTION! Cavity Car- Mini- Description

tridge Fuse
• When installing the power distribution center Fuse
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop- 1 60 Amp — Ignition Off Draw (IOD)
erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so Yellow
may allow water to get into the power distribution 2 40 Amp — Integrated Power Module
center and possibly result in an electrical system Green (IPM)
failure. 3 — — —
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to 4 40 Amp — Integrated Power Module
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. Green (IPM)
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated 5 30 Amp — Heated Seats - If Equipped
may result in a dangerous electrical system over- Pink
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
6 — 20 Amp Fuel Pump 7
Yellow
corrected. 7 — 15 Amp Rear Heated Seats - If
Blue Equipped

Fuse Fuse
8 — 15 Amp Diagnostic Link Connector 17 — 20 Amp Cluster
Blue (DLC)/Wireless Control Yellow
Module (WCM)/Wireless 18 — 20 Amp Selectable Power Outlet
Ignition Node (WIN) Yellow
9 — 20 Amp Power Outlet 19 — 10 Amp Stop Lights
Yellow Red
10 — — — 20 — — —
11 * — — — 21 — — —
12 * — — — 22 — — —
13 * — — — 23 — — —
14 — 10 Amp AC Heater Control/ 24 — — —
Red Cluster/Security Module - 25 — — —
If Equipped
26 — — —
15 — 20 Amp Trailer Tow Brake Module
Yellow - If Equipped 27 — 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Con-
Red troller (ORC)
16 — — —

Fuse Fuse
28 — 10 Amp Ignition Run 35 — 5 Amp Antenna Module - If
Red Orange Equipped/Power Mirrors/
29 — 5 Amp Adaptive Cruise Control Rain Sensor - If Equipped
Orange (ACC) - If Equipped/ 36 — 20 Amp Hands-Free Phone - If
Cluster/Electronic Stability Yellow Equipped/Video Monitor -
Program (ESP) - If If Equipped/Radio
Equipped/Powertrain 37 — 15 Amp Transmission
Control Module (PCM)/ Blue
STOP LIGHT Switch 38 — 10 Amp Analog Clock/Cargo
30 — 10 Amp Door Modules/Power Red Light/Satellite Receiver
Red Mirrors/Steering Control (SDARS) Video - If 7
Module (SCM) Equipped/Vehicle Infor-
31 — — — mation Module - If
32 — — — Equipped
33 — — — 39 — 10 Amp Heated Mirrors - If
34 — — — Red Equipped

Fuse Fuse
40 — 5 Amp Auto Inside Rearview Mir- 44 20 Amp — Amplifier - If Equipped/
Orange ror - If Equipped/Heated Blue Sunroof - If Equipped
Seats - If Equipped/Switch
* Cavities 11, 12, and 13 contain self-resetting fuses
Bank
(circuit breakers) that are only serviceable by an autho-
41 — 10 Amp AC Heater Control/
rized dealer. The cluster, the driver seat switch (if
Red Headlights/Park Assist - If
Equipped/Tire Pressure equipped), and the memory module (if equipped) are
Monitoring - If Equipped/ fused by the 25-Amp circuit breaker in Cavity 11. The
Occupant Restraint Con- passenger seat switch (if equipped) is fused by the
troller (ORC) 25-Amp circuit breaker in Cavity 12. The door modules,
42 30 Amp — Front Blower Motor the driver power window switch, and the passenger
Pink power window switch are fused by the 25-Amp circuit
43 30 Amp — Rear Window Defroster breaker in Cavity 13. If you experience temporary or
Pink permanent loss of these systems, see your authorized
dealer for service.
VEHICLE STORAGE REPLACEMENT BULBS

If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 days, you may want to take these steps to protect your Interior Bulb Number
battery. Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Rear Compartment (Trunk) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Overhead Console Reading Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of Visor Vanity Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6220
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the Glove Box Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes Door Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JKLE14140
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the Optional Door Map Pocket /
possibility of compressor damage when the system is Cupholder Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
started again. (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
7
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
for replacement instructions.
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
Exterior (300 Models) Bulb Number Exterior (300C Models) Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006 Low Beam Headlight (Standard Halogen). . . . . 9006XS
High Beam Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005 Low Beam Headlight –
Front Park/Turn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157 High Intensity Discharge (HID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D1S
Front Inner Park Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194NA (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Outer Park Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194NA High Beam Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Front Fog Light—If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . 9145/H10 Front Park/Turn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157AK
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer) Front Fog Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145/H10
Front Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer) Front Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Tail/Stop/Turn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057 (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Tail/Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Backup Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057 Tail Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Center High Mount Stop Light (CHMSL) . . . . . . . LED Turn Signal Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3757A
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer) Backup Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Center High Mount Stop Light (CHMSL) . . . . . . . LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Outside Mirror Turn Signal & Approach Lights. . . LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
BULB REPLACEMENT
Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight,
Park/Turn Light, Inner Park Light, and Outer Park
Light – 300 Models
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlight assem-
bly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun-
terclockwise, and then pull it out of the headlight assem-
bly. 1 — High Beam Headlight Bulb
2 — Low Beam Headlight Bulb 7
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the head-
light assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
3 — Park/Turn Light Bulb 4 — Inner Park Light Bulb

5 — Outer Park Light Bulb
CAUTION! WARNING!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the HID headlights when the headlight switch is turned
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electro-
bulb with rubbing alcohol. cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight, and
Park/Turn Light – 300C NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID Headlights,
when the headlights are turned on, there is a blue hue to
High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID) — If
the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
Equipped
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
The headlights are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the 7
headlight switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlight bulb
yourself. If a headlight bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
Backup Light, Side Marker Light, and Tail/Stop 4. Remove the remaining fastener from the back of the
Turn Light — 300 Models tail light assembly.
1. Open the Trunk. 5. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side.
2. Remove two fasteners from the back of the tail light 6. Disconnect the electrical connector.
assembly.
7. Pull the tail light assembly clear from the vehicle to

3. Pull back the trunk liner. access the bulbs.
8. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun-

terclockwise to remove it from the tail light assembly.
2 — Side Marker Light Bulb

7
1 — Backup Light Bulb

10. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail
11. Reinstall the tail light assembly, fasteners, electrical
connector, and trunk liner.
12. Close the trunk.
3 — Tail/Stop/Turn Light Bulb

Tail/Stop, Tail, Turn Signal Light, and Backup 4. Remove the remaining fastener from the back of the
Light — 300C Models tail light assembly.
1. Open the Trunk. 5. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side.
2. Remove two fasteners from the back of the tail light 6. Disconnect the electrical connector.
assembly.
3. Pull back the trunk liner.

7. Pull the tail light assembly clear from the vehicle to

access the bulbs. Turn bulb sockets counterclockwise to
remove.
8. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun-
terclockwise to remove it from the tail light assembly.
2 — Tail Light Bulb
1 — Tail/Stop Light Bulb

3 — Turn Signal Light Bulb 4 — Backup Light Bulb

7
10. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail
11. Reinstall the tail light assembly, fasteners, electrical

connector, and trunk liner.
12. Close the trunk.
License Light
1. Remove the screws securing the light to the rear fascia.
2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.
1 — License Light Bulb

2 — Socket
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.

5. Reattach the light to the rear fascia, and then install the
screws.
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES

U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2.7 Liter Engine 18 Gallons 68 Liters
3.5 Liter Engine without All Wheel Drive 18 Gallons 68 Liters
3.5 Liter Engine with All Wheel Drive 19 Gallons 72 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine 19 Gallons 72 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
2.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6.0 Quarts 5.7 Liters
7
Cooling System *
2.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile 9.9 Quarts 9.4 Liters
Formula) or equivalent
3.5 Liter Engine without All Wheel Drive (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/ 11.1 Quarts 10.5 Liters
Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) or equivalent
3.5 Liter Engine with All Wheel Drive (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 11.4 Quarts 10.8 Liters
Year/100,000 Mile Formula) or equivalent
5.7 Liter Engine without Severe Duty II Cooling System (MOPAR威 14.7 Quarts 13.9 Liters
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) or equivalent
5.7 Liter Engine with Severe Duty II Cooling System (MOPAR威 15.1 Quarts 14.3 Liters
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) or equivalent
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hy-
brid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
Engine Oil (2.7L Engine) Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to the engine oil fill cap for
correct SAE grade.
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to the engine oil fill cap for
correct SAE grade.
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to the engine oil fill cap for 7
correct SAE grade. NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must
use SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper operation of
the Multi-Displacement System (MDS).
Spark Plugs (2.7L Engine) TE10MCC5 (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
Spark Plugs (3.5L Engine) ZFR5LP–13G (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])

Spark Plugs (5.7L Engine) LZFR5C–11 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Oil Filter (2.7L, 3.5L, and 5.7L Engines) MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter (P/N 04884899AB) or equivalent
Fuel Selection (2.7L Engine) 87 Octane
Fuel Selection (3.5L and 5.7L Engines) 87 Octane Acceptable — 89 Octane Recommended
Chassis
Automatic Transmission MOPAR威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If DOT 3
brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recom-
mended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid + 4, MOPAR威 ATF+4 Automatic Trans-
mission Fluid
Front Axle API GL-5 SAE 75W90 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent
Rear Axle API GL-5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent
Transfer Case MOPAR威 (P/N 68049954AA) BW 44–40 Transfer Case Lubricant
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES N
T
E
N
A
CONTENTS N
C
E
䡵 Emissions Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 484 ▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 486
S
䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 484 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
N
T The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type, The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
E must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
N the continued proper functioning of the Emissions Con-
A On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
N trol System. These, and all other maintenance services
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be dis-
C included in this manual, should be done to provide best
E played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
S tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
C conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
H driving. in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
E
D will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
U
L malfunction is suspected. Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
E indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
S NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emis-
vice is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
8 performed by any automotive repair establishment or
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 485 M
A
NOTE: At Each Stop for Fuel I
N
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Engine Oil” under T
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s oil E
“Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7. N
if it has been six months since your last oil change, even
A
if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated. • Check the windshield washer solvent and add if N
required. C
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your E
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time. Once a Month
S
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals • Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or C
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, which- damage. H
ever comes first. E
• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals D
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator U
as required. L
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
E
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than • Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake S
your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by refer- master cylinder, power steering, and transmission,
ring to the steps described under “Oil Change Required” and add as needed.
8
under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
Section 4 or under “Odometer/Trip Odometer” under
operation.
“Instrument Cluster Descriptions” in Section 4.
A
I At Each Oil Change Required Maintenance Intervals
N
T Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
• Change the engine oil filter.
E pages for the required maintenance intervals.
N • Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
A
N
C CAUTION!
E
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
S may result in damage to the vehicle.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
A
I
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or 12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service N
6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule T
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. E
Schedule N
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate tires.
A
filter. ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the N
❏ Rotate tires. engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. C
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped) E
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or S
12 months. C
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or H
12 months. E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

A
I
N 18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or 24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
T 18 Months Maintenance Schedule
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N Service Schedule
❏ Rotate tires.
A ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
N filter. ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
C ❏ Rotate tires. engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
E ❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
front axle fluid — All Wheel Drive ❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
S (AWD). ❏ Inspect the CV joints.
C ❏ Inspect exhaust system.
H ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8

A
I
30 Months Maintenance Schedule T
Service Schedule N
A
filter. ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the N
❏ Rotate tires. engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. C
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped) E
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.7L and ❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid — All Wheel Drive (AWD).
5.7L Engines). ❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. S
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid — All C
H
Wheel Drive (AWD).
E
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles D
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. U
L
E
S
8

A
I
N Service Schedule
❏ Rotate tires.
E ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
S ❏ Inspect the CV joints.
C ❏ Inspect exhaust system.
H ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
E ❏ Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the
D
front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or
U
L frequent trailer towing.
E
S
8

A
I
54 Months Maintenance Schedule T
❏ E
Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
A
filter. ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. N
❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.7L and 5.7L Engines). C
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped) E
front axle fluid — All Wheel Drive ❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
(AWD). ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. S
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the C
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing. H
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, E
D
fleet, or frequent trailer towing — All Wheel Drive (AWD).
U
L
E
S
8

A
I
N Service Schedule
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid — All Wheel Drive (AWD).
S ❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
C ❏ Inspect the CV joints.
H ❏ Inspect exhaust system.
E ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
D
U
L
E
S
8

A
I
78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or 84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or N
78 Months Maintenance 84 Months Maintenance T
E
Service Schedule Service Schedule N
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil A
filter. filter. N
❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Rotate tires. C
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the E
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; S
replace if necessary. C
H
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if
E
equipped) D
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if U
necessary. L
E
S
8

A
I
N 90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or 90 Months Maintenance Service
T Schedule
N
A ❏ Rotate tires.
N ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
C ❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.7L and 5.7L Engines).
E ❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. †
S ❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid — All Wheel Drive (AWD).
C ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

A
I
96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service 102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or N
Schedule 102 Months Maintenance T
Service Schedule N
❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil A
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the filter. N
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. ❏ Rotate tires. C
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped) ❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.5L E
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. Engines).
❏ Inspect the CV joints. ❏ Replace the timing belt (3.5L Engine). S
❏ Inspect exhaust system. ❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant. C
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary. H
❏ Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the E
D
front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or
U
frequent trailer towing. L
E
S
8

A
I
N 108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service 114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
T Schedule 114 Months Maintenance
N Service Schedule
A ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
N ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the filter.
C engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. ❏ Rotate tires.
S ❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8

A
I
❏ E
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Service Schedule N
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. filter. N
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped) ❏ Rotate tires. C
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.7L and 5.7L Engines). ❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the E
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. front axle fluid — All Wheel Drive
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. (AWD). S
❏ Inspect the CV joints. C
❏ Inspect exhaust system. H
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary. E
D
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
U
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, L
fleet, or frequent trailer towing — All Wheel Drive (AWD). E
❏ Replace the accessory drive belt (2.7L/3.5L Engines). S
8

A
I
N 132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or 138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
T 132 Months Maintenance 138 Months Maintenance
E
N Service Schedule Service Schedule
A ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
N filter. filter.
C ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Rotate tires.
E ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
S Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
C replace if necessary.
H
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if
E
D equipped)
U ❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
L necessary.
E
S
8

A
I
Service Schedule N
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the filter. N
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. ❏ Rotate tires. C
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped) ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. E
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. ❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.7L and
❏ Inspect the CV joints. 5.7L Engines). S
❏ Inspect exhaust system. ❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid — All C
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary. H
Wheel Drive (AWD).
❏ Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the E
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles D
front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. U
frequent trailer towing. L
E
S
8

A
I † This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
N
T to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
E warranty.
N
A
N WARNING!
C
E You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
S have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
C
H have any doubt about your ability to perform a
E service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
D chanic.
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 503 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . 506
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
䡵 If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
▫ Chrysler LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . 504 ▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 504 9
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
502 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 503
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
YOUR VEHICLE At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
Prepare For The Appointment
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
for an appointment.
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
service history. This can often provide a clue to the with our products and services.
current problem.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
Prepare A List We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the authorized dealer. They know you and the vehicle best,
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident and are most concerned that you get prompt and high
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers
service advisor know. have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special
Be Reasonable With Requests tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is 9
If you list a number of items and you must have your fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
This is why you should always talk to an authorized Chrysler LLC Customer Center
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re- P.O. Box 21–8004
solved with this process. Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
ship. They want to know if you need assistance. P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
Phone: (800) 465–2001
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center. In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
ter should include the following information:
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s name and address In Mexico City: 5081-7568
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office) Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech have any questions about the service contract, call the
Impaired (TDD/TTY) manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hot-
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the line at 1-800-521-9922.
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service con-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
tract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
responsible for any service contract other than the manu-
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
facturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service con-
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
tract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and you
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Lim-
Service Contract ited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract docu-
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle ments, and contact the person listed in those documents.
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
9
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
concerns.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
WARNING!
Mopar威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain available from an authorized dealer. They will help keep
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals the vehicle operating at its best.
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi- REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi- If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only) manufacturer.
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
provisions of Chrysler Motors LLC warranties applicable
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
to this vehicle.
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153), To order the following manuals, you may use either the
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra- website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tor, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. for an order form.
In Canada NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
• Service Manuals
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to: These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations information that students and professional technicians
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
3V9. maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler LLC
vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the ve-
hicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, 9
and charts.
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Call toll free at:

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia- • 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve- Or
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, • www.techauthority.com
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment. DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
• Owner’s Manuals The following tire grading categories were established by
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
assistance of service and engineering specialists to specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles. in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
Included are starting, operating, emergency and main- your vehicle.
tenance procedures as well as specifications, capabili- All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
ties and safety tips. requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
WARNING!
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
conditions on a specified government test course. For straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
times as well on the government course as a tire graded peak traction characteristics.
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart Temperature Grades
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac- representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
teristics and climate. and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
Traction Grades
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor- 9
mance.
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-

sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
512 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,66,80,213

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . 157 Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55,62
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 447 Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55,62
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,217
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 All Wheel Drive (AWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333,454
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 437 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298,300 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . 446,447,479
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307,441 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 341,343
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 18
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . 298,300,301,440 Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218,358 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . 18
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,64 Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
INDEX 513
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323,328

Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Automatic Transmission Limp Home
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31,32 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327,331,332
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 211,227 Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 301 Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Automatic Transaxle
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . 323,328,452,453 Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453,482 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 25
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418,438
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44,80
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323,328 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 10
514 INDEX
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435,436

Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451,482 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79,383
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94,297
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 78 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Check Engine Light
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467,469 (Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,467 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,70,73,75
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,73
Caps, Filler Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
INDEX 515
Cleaning Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 448

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242,244,258,262,271 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445,449
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . 446,479,481
Connector Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 154,157
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . 282 Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197,459
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 10
516 INDEX
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Driving
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 DVD Player (Video Entertainment System™) . . . . 293
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,299,305
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Electric Rear Window Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Dipsticks Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433,434 Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Electronic Stability Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Disposal Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . 459
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . 154,157
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
INDEX 517
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . 218 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 221 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79,383
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Emergency, In Case of Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Multi-Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433,479,481
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211,227,434
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435,436
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 431,484 Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427,428,429 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435,479
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433,434 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427,428,429 Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435,436
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445,481 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 65 10
518 INDEX
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79,383,443 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79,443 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Fluid Level Checks
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Filters Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433,434
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307,441 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437,481 Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 481
Flashers Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143,210
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,144,210 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Flat Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
INDEX 519
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384,430

Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Gauges
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379,481 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323,328
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,26,122,177,379
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387,390
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387,389
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 185 10
520 INDEX
Hands-Free Phone (UConnect威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Hazard Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 145
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Hitches
Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Holder, Coin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 185
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . 145 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,14
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141,148 Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,69
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
INDEX 521
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208,210 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Keyless Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,232,314
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 Kicker Sound System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . 72,73
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Latch Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,467 10
522 INDEX
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,139 Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,66,80,213 Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . 141,148
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145,217
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467,469 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139,210
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145,184 Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146,184
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144,145 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . 347 Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Electronic Throttle Control Warning . . . . . . . . . 218 Low Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 220
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145,184
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143,210 Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . 146
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139,471 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145,184
INDEX 523
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467,469 Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 220 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,73
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . 218,369 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,144,210
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 210 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387,388 Maintenance, Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 220,431
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145,184
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 10
524 INDEX
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 379,481
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210,216
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210,216
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211,227
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211,227
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433,481
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211,227,434
Mode Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433,434
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433,434
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437,481
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432,506 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Multi-Displacement Engine System . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435,479
INDEX 525
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435,436,479 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430,431 Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 353
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Power
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 459,462
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216,405 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 194
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,507 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337,338
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 10
526 INDEX
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Pretensioners Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Programming Transmitters Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 448 Remote Control
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287,293 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 295
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Remote Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
INDEX 527
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 211,227 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 49

Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,69,70,75
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44,46
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506 Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287,293 Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43,44,80 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 10
528 INDEX
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . 318,323,328
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55,62
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,217 Side Curtain (Window Airbag) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 446,481 Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,144,210
Self-Sealing Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Sirius Backseat TV™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Sound System
Service Engine Soon Light Kicker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361,406
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242,244,258,262,271 Specifications
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
INDEX 529
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 154,157 Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,313 Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Emergency (Jump Starting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 54
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,151
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337,338 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 301
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,151 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 215,405
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,151 Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198,467 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,151
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307,467 Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 10
530 INDEX
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 353 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348,357
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,357,508 Self-Sealing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406,409 Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408,409 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353,354 Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
INDEX 531
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Range Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323,328
Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . 401 Transmitter Battery Service
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 185
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Transmitter Programming
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 20
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210,216
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,43
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454,482 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144,210
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318,323,328,452 UConnect威 (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 10
532 INDEX
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 282 Warning Lights
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148,442
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Water
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354,387,388 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307,467 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41,193
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 18 Window Airbag (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55,62
Video Entertainment System™ Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
(Rear Seat Video System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435,436 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,299,305
INDEX 533
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147,148

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone only fully shielded coaxial cable.
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
The positive power connection should be made directly
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
normal may require special precautions.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
This connection should not be fused. ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
Chrysler LLC
81-026-0943 First Edition Printed in U.S.A.

2009 Chrysler 300c 68

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2009 Chrysler 300c 68

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2009 Chrysler 300c 68

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA

INTRODUCTION HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 53 ▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

Fob with Integrated Key

Ignition Key Removal Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information

NOTE: the vehicle. Once an RKE transmitter is programmed to a

General Information Rearming of the System

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)

Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st

NOTE: RKE Transmitter Battery Service

To Turn Off the Engine While in Remote Start

Child Lock Control

Window Lockout Switch

Reset Wind Buffeting

Trunk Release Button

TRUNK SAFETY WARNING

normal conditions. However, in a collision, the belt will

Pulling Out the Lap/Shoulder Belt Latch Plate

Inserting Latch Plate into Buckle

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your

5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage

Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental

Front Airbag Components

NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal

Window Airbag SRS Label Location

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat

seat as far back as possible and use the proper child

Airbag System Components • Seat Belt Reminder Light

• The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic

Enhanced Accident Response System Maintaining Your Airbag System

Data parameters that may be recorded: • Transmission gear selection

Infants and Child Restraints

• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug

connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail-

Tether Strap Mounting Transporting Pets

▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 112 ▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With ▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

▫ Trunk Mat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 ▫ Electric Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . 201

Adjusting Rearview Mirror

Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror — If Equipped

Automatic Dimming Mirror

Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer — If Equipped

Power Mirror Control

Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect姞) —

• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say

NOTE: Working with Automated Systems

used for navigating through an automated customer Barge In - Overriding Prompts

Advanced Phone Connectivity List Paired Cellular Phone Names

Select Another Cellular Phone Delete UConnect威 Paired Cellular Phones

• Performance is maximized under: • It is not recommended to store similar sounding

• low-to-medium vehicle speed, • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be